JP2022022381A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent an improper operation in a setting change.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: game control means having a processor for performing a program to execute control on a game, and a memory that the processor accesses; clear means for initializing a predetermined area of the memory; and setting operation means for changing settings on the control executed by the game control means. The setting operation means includes setting change operation means for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed. The game control means detects the operation of the clear means and the operation of the setting change operation means when power is supplied to the game machine, and starts the setting state when the clear means is operated and the setting change operation means is operated.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 146

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine in which a setting state such as a winning lottery probability or an execution probability of various effects is set to any one of a plurality is known by a setting change operation by a game hall manager. In such a gaming machine, for example, a setting key is inserted into a predetermined setting key insertion portion arranged on the back surface side of the gaming machine, the inserted setting key is rotated in a specific direction, and then the power is turned on to the gaming machine. Therefore, it is common to control the above-mentioned setting state to a changeable setting change allowable state.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 6-91049

The above-mentioned setting function can change the performance of the gaming machine regarding the prize ball acquired by the player, and the setting function can change the performance of the gaming machine according to the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, since the game profit obtained by the player changes by changing the setting, if the setting operation is easy, there is a possibility that the setting is changed by mistake.

An object of the present invention is to prevent erroneous operation of changing the settings of a gaming machine.

The present invention comprises a processor that executes a program for controlling a game, a game control means having a memory accessed by the processor, and a game control means.
A clearing means for initializing a predetermined area of the memory and
The setting operation means operated when setting the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
Power-on means for turning on the power of the gaming machine, and
An external output means that can output various signals to the outside of the gaming machine,
Equipped with
The game control means is
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clearing means and the operation of the setting operating means can be detected, and the clearing means is operated and the setting operating means is operated. Start the setting state for setting the above setting value,
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clearing means and the operation of the setting operating means can be detected, the clearing means is not operated, and the setting operating means is operated. , Start the confirmation state to confirm the above set value,
It is characterized in that a signal is output from the external output means not only when the setting state is started but also when the confirmation state is started.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation of setting change.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view which cut the front component and the front unit in a game board at the substantially center in the front-rear direction in a game area. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a figure which shows the structure in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the arithmetic circuit in a main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of a serial communication circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the accessory ratio calculation / display process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the program (code) and data stored in the ROM, RAM built in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the structure of the accessory ratio display. It is a figure which shows the structure of a driver circuit. It is a timing diagram of the data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio display. It is a figure which shows the load register selection table. It is a figure which shows the character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the display example of the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the display example of the accessory ratio. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation / display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the base calculation area. It is a front view which shows another example of a game board. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 2. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 1. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 2. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation process 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 3. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base display process. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the connection example of a discharge ball sensor and a main control board. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of the main control input circuit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the main control I / O port. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the main control I / O port. It is a timing diagram in the configuration example of the main control I / O port shown in FIG. 97. It is a figure which shows the change of the state (interval) to calculate the base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character displayed on a base display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the base calculation area 13128. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. 105. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base display data generation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the base calculation process. It is a figure which shows the calculation of the base when the game state is switched. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recorded in the game machine. It is a figure which shows the example of the error screen. It is a figure which shows the example of the error signal. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game history. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a peripheral control board and its surroundings. It is a block diagram which shows the peripheral structure of the peripheral control SRAM. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows the transformation example of a game history. It is a figure which shows the transformation example of a game history. It is a figure which shows the transformation example of a game history. It is a block diagram which shows schematic the control composition of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back with the door open. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126 as viewed from behind with the door closed. It is a figure which shows the setting part of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126. It is a figure which shows the modification of the setting part. It is a block diagram which shows schematic the control composition of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown in FIG. 131 from the back. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. (A) is an example of a variable pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a variable pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in the deviation variation pattern 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a reduced working hours state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a reduced working hours state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows another mounting example of a main control board. FIG. 6B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA'in FIG. 147 (B). It is a figure which shows another mounting example of a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a timing diagram of a security signal. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member open. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, etc. provided in a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the detail of the storage area provided by ROM, RAM and the like in this embodiment, and the ROM area. It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the system reset start process which is executed when a slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a periodic process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of information signal N output processing.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and viewed from the front. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine having the door frame 3, the game board 5, and the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 has an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the 20 to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 having a square outer shape in front view and penetrating back and forth, and a game attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the game ball attached to the lower right part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the door into the game area of the game board 5, and a dish unit 200 that receives a game ball that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower plate 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and for sending the game ball of the upper plate 201 to the ball launcher 680, and a door frame base unit 100. It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 which are attached to the right side surface of the front view of the main body frame base. , And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by the liquid crystal display device. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided not in the main control unit 1300 but in the payout control board unit 950.

Further, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 may display the accessory ratio without separately providing a display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, if the bonus ratio is constantly displayed on any of the liquid crystal displays 1600, 3114, and 244, the bonus ratio can be notified to the player, and the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be described later, the bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of winning balls by the total number of winning balls. Since it has been obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of the bonus ratio (for example, 10%) has few big hit games and few prize balls during the big hit, so it can be said that the condition is not good. Therefore, the player can select the pachinko machine to play in consideration of the numerical value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode for notifying the player of the bonus ratio, the numerical value of the bonus ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and if it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in green. do. The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in such a manner that it is not mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative symbol when it does not change, or the size of the number indicating the accessory ratio may be smaller than that of the decorative symbol. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the player may be notified of the bonus ratio by changing the mode of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the numerical value of the bonus ratio. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the decorative pattern is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red. When the ratio is 69% to 30%, the decorative pattern is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit in green. Or flashes. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, it may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At that time, the above-mentioned display mode may be changed, or the display may be performed together with other information as well as the accessory ratio. Other information includes the number of big hits, the number of consecutive big hits (so-called number of consecutive chans), the number of balls held, and the remaining balance.

Further, not only the accessory ratio but also the continuous accessory ratio and the base value, which will be described later, may be displayed in different modes as described above. The display mode of the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the base value may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320 sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and is arranged on the printed circuit board. You can see the removed parts from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided in the main control unit 1300 can be pachinko. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in order to make the gambling of the gaming machine 1 look low, and the accuracy of the gaming machine 1 can be prevented. Can display gambling.

When the back cover 980 is made of an opaque resin, pachinko can be made by making a hole in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or by making the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 transparent. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be viewed from the back surface side of the machine 1.

Further, even when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, by forming the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 flat or by forming the back cover 980 thinly, the accessory ratio indicator is formed. The ratio display 1317 may be easily seen from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

Below the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided a discharge port for collecting game balls that have flowed out from the game area 5a via the out ports 1111 and winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island equipment. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 that detects a game ball discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with the accessory ratio display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole in which the accessory ratio display switch 1318 can be operated. It is preferable to indicate (print, engraving, seal, etc.) that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board near the accessory ratio display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320. It is desirable that the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is provided near the accessory ratio display 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is in a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, an effect). It may be provided on the control board 4700, the power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. Peripheral control units 1500, a relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, a power supply board in a power supply board box 930 on the frame side, or a payout control board unit 950 may be provided. Further, as will be described later, the accessory ratio display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the accessory ratio display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are directed to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game ball, which is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guide unit 820, is instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. The payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on the above, and the game ball that is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and is paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. From the upper full tank path unit 850 that discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the situation, and from the normal discharge port of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. A normal taxiway that guides the released game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and a game ball released from the full tank discharge port is guided forward and the door frame 3 is guided from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway for guiding to the full tank ball receiving port 530.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed therein. The payout control board unit 950 and the like are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the gaming board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a into which the gaming ball is driven, and the gaming ball launched from the ball launching device 680 is placed on the upper part of the gaming area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to be guided to, a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part on the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 to control the game of the pachinko machine 1. A table unit having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning openings mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving a game ball driven into the game area 5a (not shown). ), And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 on the upper side of the board holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning openings. .. Since the payout of the game ball can enhance the interest of the player, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the gaming board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 16 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 having a substantially square shape in front view and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is partitioned, and the rear end of the game area 5a attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) that controls the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of 1100, main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and mounted on the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front constituent member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that a game ball driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first major winning opening 2005 and a second major winning opening 2006, which can accept game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second major winning opening 2006 is composed of two major winning openings, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one channel through which the game ball is distributed (Fig.). 16).

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted on the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005, and a starting port unit 2100. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is arranged in a predetermined position in the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The mechanism 3020, and the right ball passage unit 3030 for discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, which are attached to the right end of the front view in the back box 3010. A lower right ball passage unit that is attached near the front end of the lower right corner of the front view in the back box 3010 and for discharging the game ball received in the second large winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with 3035.

Further, the back unit 3000 is rotatably attached to the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 housed in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. It includes a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

A launch ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball driven into the game area 5a is provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007). For example, the launch ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and has flowed into the game area 5a. The launch ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position in the game area where the game ball always passes. By fixing the position of the launch ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, the specifications can be standardized among a plurality of models, and the inspection at the manufacturing site and the inspection after installation in the hall become easy.

Further, the launch ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects the out ball before the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of the out balls and the prize balls, the prize balls caused by the game balls that are not counted as the out balls are not detected, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. When the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, the board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side. As a result, the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game ball discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the outer side of the game area 5a in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status display consisting of one LED for displaying the game status and two LEDs based on the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variablely displayed by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Of these, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 (starting prize). By controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery drawn by (occurrence), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery. Among the fluctuation displays of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, the number of pending numbers, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the fluctuation display has not yet been satisfied. Eight LEDs blink based on the first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 (occurrence of starting prize). A second special symbol display that displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result after variable display of the second special symbol by control, and acceptance of a game ball into the second starting port 2004. The second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the first special When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., a round display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. And, mainly prepared. In addition, a part of the display (for example, the first special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 may be configured by a 7-segment LED.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main LCD display device]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface of the front view and a right fixing piece protruding outward from the right side surface of the front view. It is equipped with 1602. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and move the lock mechanism 3020 downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006 that can accept a game ball at either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Three of the plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning openings 2001 arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a are arranged directly above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening opening 1111. The second big winning opening 2006 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first starting opening 2002 and above the first big winning opening 2005.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second major winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path in which the game ball is distributed. It is composed of. In the second major winning opening 2006, the second upper winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower winning opening 2006b is the front view of the second upper winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted on the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005, and a starting port unit 2100. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005.

The starting port unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first large winning opening 2005 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right and penetrates back and forth, and the first unit base 2101. The ball receiving portion 2102, which protrudes forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction to form the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, above the large winning opening 2005. The ball guiding unit 2103 that guides the game ball received in 2002 downward, the first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detects the game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and the first It is equipped with a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the start port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first prize opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is substantially the same size as the first prize opening 2005 and opens forward. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. The member 2112, the first attacker solenoid 2113 installed in the unit case 2111 and driving the opening and closing of the door member 2112, and the first large winning opening 2005 installed in the unit case 2111. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 that detects the game ball, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first big winning opening sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310 that are mounted on the upper surface of the unit case 2111. It is provided with a start port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection with and a start port unit decoration board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 to illuminate and decorate the first prize opening 2005. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is open upward with a size that allows only one game ball to be received at a time. The first large winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 is open forward with a size capable of accepting a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding unit 2103. It can be guided downward on the rear side of 2101, detected by the first start port sensor 2104, and then discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided, and on the main control board 1310, when the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. As a result, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts due to unauthorized insertion of a tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is open to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the mouth 2005 from the rear and closes the first prize-winning mouth 2005. In the upright state where the first prize opening door member 2112 is closed, the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is forward and The first major winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state by rotating it so as to move downward.

The first large winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first large winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first big prize opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly above the lower side. It will be in a positioned state. That is, the door member 2112 of the first prize-winning door is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first prize-winning door 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first prize-winning door 2005 and comes into contact with the first prize-winning door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first prize-winning door member 2112. It changes to the rear and is accepted by the first prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first prize opening 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first prize opening sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effect devices during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a precision liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the display device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by the rotation operation of the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311 that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and an input / output device (I). / O device) main control I / O port 1314, main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and main control. It is provided with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551 The first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 that detects the game ball accepted in the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b as the second major winning opening 2006. Detection signals from the second lower winning opening sensor 2557, the ejection ball sensor 3060, the launching ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are transmitted via the main control I / O port 1314, respectively. Is entered.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display, and the first special symbol storage of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, and the like.

In this embodiment, the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening. The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 2104 and the second starting port sensor 2551 are used. And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the game ball is frequently played. In order to enter the ball, the detection of the game ball by the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557 also occurs frequently. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or something. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to the control of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. It may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. When the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It has.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various information in the RAM 1312 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I / O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with the accessory ratio display switch 1318. The accessory ratio display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be a switch of another type. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, and the display content may be switched by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration in the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 includes CPU 13111, RAM 1312, ROM 1313, random number generation circuit 13112, parallel input port 13113, serial communication circuit 13114, timer circuit 13115, interrupt controller 13116, external bus interface 13117, clock circuit 13118, collation block 13119, and unique. It has information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122.

The CPU 13111 executes the program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data necessary for executing the program.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery result of the result of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect content of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation means that outputs a random number updated at the timing of a clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is used for a lottery for winning a special symbol, a lottery for a winning symbol in a special symbol variation display game, and a lottery for winning a normal symbol.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to and from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various information (game information) related to the game, various commands related to the payout of the game ball, and the like to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts (general interrupts, NMIs that cannot be masked by software) to the CPU 13111. That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the vector table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. From the external bus interface 13117, I / O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7) can be input / output.

The clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from an input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by a set number and outputs the clock signal to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, a clock signal supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

The collation block 13119 is a functional block that collates whether the ROM 1313 has been tampered with by using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311 and is written in a non-rewritable manner when the chip is manufactured.

The calculation circuit 13121 provides a calculation function that does not depend on the program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The reset circuit 13122 has a non-designated running prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address other than the predetermined address of the ROM 1313, the non-designated travel prohibition circuit presumes that the access is due to an invalid program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by the reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The calculation circuit 13121 provides a calculation function that does not depend on a program for the calculation result, and has a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that outputs a product of 32 bits by multiplying two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits), and converts the input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product by a multiplication function. It functions as a conversion circuit to output.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a multiplier and a multiplicand of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads out the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at predetermined timings, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 acquires the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing the value to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the calculation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 is configured to complete the multiplication input register 131212. , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that outputs a quotient of 32 bits and a remainder of 32 bits by dividing the dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by the divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits). It functions as a conversion circuit that converts input values (divisors and divisions) into quotients and remainders by a function and outputs them.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a division number of 32 bits or less in the division input register A131216, and stores a division of 32 bits or less in the division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that a value is stored in both the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, it reads the stored value at a predetermined timing and divides the dividend by the divisor to obtain the quotient. The division result register A131218 stores the remainder, and the division result register B131219 stores the remainder. Further, when the division circuit 131215 reads the value stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, the read value may be erased and the register may be cleared. Further, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start instruction is input, and store the division result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may not be erased at the read timing. Further, the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may be capable of overwriting the value even if the value is already stored (without clearing the stored value).

The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. The process from writing the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the calculation result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks), and the CPU 13111 is configured to complete the division input. The values can be stored in the registers 131216 and 131217, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the quotient and the remainder can be obtained by referring to the division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described later, a division process is required to calculate the base value, and the division executed by the CPU 13111 in the program is executed by a plurality of multiplications and subtractions, so that a considerable amount of time is required. This is the case. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 75 and 80). .. Further, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. Base calculation processing during timer interrupt processing can be executed efficiently.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission / reception circuits, and each data transmission / reception circuit transmits / receives data for one channel to / from a predetermined device. Note that FIG. 20 illustrates only the data transmission circuit, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is mounted) will be omitted.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 has a channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, a channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and a bonus ratio. Three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. Has 3149.

The data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds an error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores the error detection code in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at a rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission status.

The communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling the transmission of data. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data in which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores a baud rate setting for defining a data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, the presence / absence of use of FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bit bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity, or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, the FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ××× 1010B meaning even parity. Is set, and in the channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, the stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ××× 1000B meaning that parity is not used are set.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Further, since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set the parity when transmitting data at high speed to the outside of the main control board 1310.

Since the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less affected by noise as compared with communication with other boards via communication wires. Further, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. In addition, along the pattern of transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, in the left-right and / or thickness direction of the signal line provided on the surface or the inner layer of the printed circuit board). A ground pattern is provided on the layer adjacent to the ground pattern, and noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shielding effect of the ground pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data in which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the relevant bit in the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a vacancy in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

The bit in the status register can be used to determine whether the transmit FIFO has an abnormality. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFA of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the bit of the status register is not set, the FIFA of the transmission data register 3142 is not free, so that the transmission data register 3142 has no space. It may be determined that the data has not been transmitted from the FIFA, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed.

The baud rate register 3148 determines the data transmission rate. For example, 19200 bps is set for channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, 1200 bps is set for channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. 1200 bps is set for the channel 2 used for communication with.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted in each channel. This is because the gaming ball is rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is in an environment susceptible to noise. Therefore, the data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that the data for controlling the ball ejection directly related to the profit given to the player is surely transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has nothing to do with the exit of the ball. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and if it is determined that the command is abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 is not operated or abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) is executed, and the command is commanded. Request to resend. Then, when it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored by using the normal command. Therefore, in the communication with the peripheral control board 1510, data can be transmitted at a high rate. Further, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the starting port to the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, which may reduce the interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be performed at a high rate (data transmission rate of 19200 bps with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (data transmission rate of 1200 bps with the payout control board 951). good. Further, the communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 has a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). A rate between and may be adopted. This is because when the data transmission rate is increased, there is a possibility that other circuits may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data is retransmitted for each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the display content of the accessory ratio display 1317. Is returned to normal, so there is no need to make the transmission rate extremely slow.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission status, and for example, each bit is defined as follows.
Bit 7: A flag indicating that SnTC transmission is completed, 0 indicates that transmission is in progress, and 1 indicates that transmission is completed. Bit 6: In the SnTDBE normal mode (communication mode that does not use FIFO), it is a flag indicating transmission data emptyness, 0 indicates that it has not been transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates that it has been transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, when the data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 3142, the data is set.

In the SnTFL FIFO mode, it is a flag indicating the transmission FIFO trigger level. 0 is the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is equal to or higher than the trigger level, and 1 is stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Indicates that the amount of transmitted data is less than the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5 to 2: Unused (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: A bit for clearing the SnTCL transmission buffer and break code transmission, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), and is written from the outside. For example, when forcibly clearing the contents of the buffer, 1 is set in the relevant bit. More specifically, it is used when a command is written in the FIFO, but the transmission of the written command is stopped due to some reason (for example, an abnormality occurs). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of pacing synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission / reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a serial communication circuit for pacing synchronization and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be separately provided.

Further, although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating a data acquisition timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. Although detailed illustration of the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game ball is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 682, and the ball by the ball feed solenoid 551 are performed. A launch control unit 953 that controls feed, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. The 803, the ball guidance unit 820, and the ball pulling switch for discharging the game ball in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball pulling operation are provided.

[3-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is a micro having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout serially via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, and the ball burnout detection sensor 827 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. To.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1. Of the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signal generated by the main control board 1310 is output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

The error LED display is a segment display, and displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, a blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830 to indicate that the payout blade is difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is displayed. If there is, a "count switch error" is notified (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number "5" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, it means that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full tank". (Specifically, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is set to, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control boards 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Occasionally, it notifies that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Will be done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. Entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551, is not shown in detail, but is a launch control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 5a based on this clock signal, and this firing reference pulse. It is provided with a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 682 based on the above, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the emission reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle operation sensor 507, the firing reference pulse inputs the driving current for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a with the launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle lever 504. When it is done, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launcher 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power cutoff process even when the power supply is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. , A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above, and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the vibration exciter 242 provided in the frame 3 and the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, and the collar provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to LEDs, etc., and door-side drive light emission data composed of frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to door frame 3 side Control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the precision liquid crystal display device 244 can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. In addition, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 mounted on the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and music and music according to various effects from the speaker 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and the like. Control so that sound effects etc. flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 2ch stereo signal, or a 2.1ch surround signal) as sound information is connected to a plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and a bass speaker 921 of the main body frame 4. By sending 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has a built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from this peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of commands different from the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

The effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives a game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 provided in the door frame 3, the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Output to.

[3-3b. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 60. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs a power-on processing of the peripheral control unit as shown in FIG. 60. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands and pachinko related to control of game effects output from the main control board 1310. It is in a state where it can receive various commands such as commands related to the state of the machine 1.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and the calendar information storage unit is stored in the peripheral control RAM as the current calendar information. And set it in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal is input to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. The peripheral control unit V-blank signal to be described later is executed. The value 1 is set in the interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 119. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 220C is operated based on the detection signals from various detection switches 258 provided in the effect operation unit 220. Based on the various information obtained from the above, the presence or absence of the operation of the operation button 220C is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game production.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP displays the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP in the display data creation process described later by the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decorative substrate 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation process described later to the speaker 921, and notifies the speaker 921 in addition to the music and sound effects. Sound data of sound and notification sound is output to the speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to indicate which screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, in order to indicate which light emission data from the first light emission data is to be the light emission mode of various LEDs among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. , Update the pointer.

In the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP from the command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program is information transmitted from the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and is a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command) described later. The various commands received in the receiving means) are analyzed (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays as described above, the effect control program issues various abnormality notifications. Peripheral control ROM of peripheral control unit 1511 for screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for execution. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and that one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into various commands, for example, status displays. In the case of the error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (effect device), the door frame side. A decorative board 233 (effect device) and a lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data. It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the unit 1511, set in the peripheral control RAM, and lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. The door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, created, and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and creates sprite data on the game board side decorative board 3053. And the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the decorative board 233 on the door frame side is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM and controls the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control RAM to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backs them up. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up.

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -The value 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from setting the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the V blank signal is used. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

Next, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 61 can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 61 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). End this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 60 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 62 (step). S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60, in which the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the V blank signal is used. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms timer interrupt is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. Drives electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids according to the drive data instructed by, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and executes this motor and solenoid drive process each time. Update the pointer.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, it is possible to acquire the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 are input. (Operation history information of button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect receiver IC of the door frame side decorative board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decorative board 233 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is judged, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are backed up. Make a backup by copying to one area and the second backup area.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60, various processes related to the above-mentioned effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing, restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms Timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the decorative substrate 3053 on the game board side and the decorative substrate 233 on the door frame side, and the peripheral control MPU and the VDP with a built-in sound source are mounted. Even in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[3-4. Liquid crystal display control unit]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is described as a microprocessor, although detailed illustration is omitted. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and the main liquid crystal. An image ROM for storing various data on the screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. And have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. It stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the above, its control data (display command) and the corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, various screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data are previously transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and extracts the sprite data from the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Further, the VDP outputs an executing signal to the display control MPU to that effect when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU. do. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left-right direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and the line buffer holds the drawing data. This is a method of outputting the held drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display. This will affect the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the precision plate liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a position where they are arranged on the screen and a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing sprites"), and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. It is drawn on the 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front thereof. And a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction intersecting that one direction. In the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, when the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is input, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 as the main scan. Output to each minute pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10, 16, 16, 17, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more the ball is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be driven. That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes the obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are not shown. The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down while contacting the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522 which is open in the frame of 2500 through the guide path 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth from side to side to the central guide portion 2531 in the center in the left-right direction or the side guide portions 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is released backward from any of the above. When the game ball is discharged into the game area 5a from the central guide portion 2531 of the stage 2530, since the central guide portion 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, the game released from the central guide portion 2531. The ball is likely to be accepted into the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are discharged from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the first large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved toward the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2302 of the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven) to the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ), And enter the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right distribution space 2541, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails and circulates while changing its flow direction in various ways. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper part, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549 are provided at the lower part.

The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side thereof. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b that are lined up side by side as the second prize opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side of the front view into the game area 5a. It is released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball faces the first big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100, and when the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball flowing through the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right distribution space 2543 flows down while the increase in the distribution speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b may enter the discharge passage 2543b that is branched near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a in the lower right distribution space 2543, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b may enter the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, it is an ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. An ordinary lottery is performed by acquiring one ordinary random number from among them and collating the acquired ordinary random number with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table. If the result of this normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time reduction control described later is not executed, the second start opening door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the second start opening. With 2004 in the open state, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time reduction control is executed, a lottery is made as to whether the "normal hit" is "first normal hit", "second normal hit", or "third normal hit" in the normal lottery. Then, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is any of "first normal hit", "second normal hit", and "third normal hit" when the time reduction control is executed, the second start door member 2549 Front view After rotating in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004 so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, the front view By rotating in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004, the opening / closing control that makes it impossible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004 is performed a predetermined number of times (5 in this example). Repeat over (times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "first normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted, and the period of each of the five times is "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" as the period for each of the 5 times in which the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. , "0.3 seconds", and if the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "third normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. The period is "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", and "second normal hit" and "third normal". The "hit" is more advantageous to the player than the "first normal hit" (it is easy to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004). When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are discharged from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, the variation display of the normal symbol is started and then the normal symbol is displayed. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display (until the result of the normal lottery is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal fluctuation time). At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the lapse of the normal fluctuation time. It should be noted that during the execution of the time reduction control, which will be described later, the control for shortening the normal fluctuation time is executed as compared with the normal state (the state in which the time reduction control is not executed). Further, the opening time for rotating the second starting port door member 2549 to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state, for example, time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, a new game ball is placed in the gate section between the time when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped and displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested). After passing through 2003, it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display, so the variable display of the normal symbol is started until the variable display of the previous normal symbol is completed (of the normal lottery result). I try to put it on hold (until the suggestion is finished). Specifically, the ordinary random numbers acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 are stored, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol can be started. Until then, the start of variable display of normal symbols is suspended. The number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. .. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the pachinko machine 1 is updated within a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310. By acquiring one first special random number from one special random number and collating the acquired first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit"). , "Small hit", etc.), the first special lottery result is drawn. Then, based on the lottery first special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result. The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the first special lottery result after the first special symbol is variablely displayed). In addition, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" are included in the first special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002. Yes, by collating the acquired first special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and further, after the jackpot game, it is normal (low probability state: in this example, there is a probability of about 1/395). Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) rather than the jackpot (winning the jackpot). Whether or not to execute (whether or not it is a probabilistic big hit) and whether or not to execute a time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual when at least the first special lottery result is out of order (whether or not it is a time saving big hit). K) and the period during which the time reduction control is executed (time reduction frequency: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)) are also determined. The winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310. By acquiring the second special random number of the above and collating the acquired second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. ) Is generated. The lottery of the second special lottery result is performed. Then, based on the result of the second special lottery drawn, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result is obtained. The result of the second special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the result of the second special lottery after displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner). In addition, the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball in the second starting port 2004 includes "missing", "2R big hit", "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", and so on. There are "7R big hit", "8R big hit", and "16R big hit", and by collating the acquired second special random number with the big hit judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and further, after the big hit game, it is normal ( Low probability state: Probability improvement control that improves the probability of winning a big hit (winning probability) rather than winning a big hit with a probability of about 1/395 in this example (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): this example Then, whether or not to execute (whether or not the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) (whether or not it is a probable variable jackpot), and at least when the second special lottery result is out of order, the time reduction control that shortens the fluctuation time than usual It is also determined whether or not (time reduction state) is executed (whether or not it is a time reduction jackpot) and the period during which time reduction control is executed (time reduction number: special symbol (number of changes of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)). It is supposed to be done.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. , Eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, and then the first prize opening Either 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the payout device is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. A predetermined number of game balls from 830 (for example, 11 when the game ball is accepted in the first prize opening 2005, or 15 when the game ball is received in the second prize opening 2006). Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 are able to accept the game ball, by having the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 accept the game ball, many games are played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first big winning opening 2005 will play the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing after becoming an acceptable open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the first jackpot A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball can be accepted, or the first major winning opening 2005 is predetermined. If either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006, either condition is satisfied. , The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "4R jackpot" is 4 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "16R jackpot" is 16 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds)). In the open / closed pattern in which the game ball is opened and then closed so that the game ball can be accepted), it is practically difficult to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit". (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls will be accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted for the second major winning opening 2006. When the above conditions are satisfied, it is easy to put the game ball into the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in the opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state. If the result of the special lottery is "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first big winning opening 2005 is predetermined. Either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern that makes the game ball unacceptable is executed may be a substantial special lottery result, and the number (for example,) predetermined to the first major winning opening 2005 as the special lottery result. , 7) or if a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in the second major winning opening 2006, the game balls are satisfied. An opening / closing pattern that makes the closed state unacceptable and an opening / closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) A device may be provided to perform a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed for a period of (~ 0.6 seconds). For example, as a result of the special lottery, a "8R jackpot with a real 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted in the first major winning opening 2005, or the second major winning opening is accepted. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in 2006, or if any of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern of closing the game balls in an unacceptable closed state is repeated four times, and then the game balls are closed. An opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) in the first big winning opening 2005). The opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed may be repeated four times.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second major winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second major winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of "big hit", for example, in the first round (1st round), the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened to allow the game ball to be accepted, and it is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions for making it unacceptable, and then it is accepted. Until (during the interval), the next round (2R) that opens the second lower prize opening 2006b to allow the game ball to be accepted is started, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has passed in the meantime, the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened again so that the game ball can be accepted. Then, the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are exhausted. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, either the second upper prize opening 2006a or the second lower prize opening 2006b is in a state where the game ball can be accepted during the "big hit". If you hit right with and distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball will always be accepted in the second big prize opening 2006, and the player will be entertained by eliminating the loss of the game ball. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, in some of the above-mentioned large hits, whether or not the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. For example, in the non-time reduction state (the state in which the time reduction control is not executed), when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot that does not execute the probability improvement control after the jackpot game, the time reduction control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. Further, in the non-time reduction state (the state in which the time reduction control is not executed), when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot that does not execute the probability improvement control after the jackpot game, the time reduction control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (the state where the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, the probability improvement control is executed after the big hit game by the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result in the low probability non-time saving state (the state where both the probability improvement control and the time saving control are not executed: also called the normal state). In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, in a state where the probability improvement control is executed or the time saving control is executed, that is, in a state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. In the case of a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display by the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 are the first. (Ii) The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the first. (Ii) The first start is performed until the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the start port 2004, is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested). When a new game ball is received in the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display newly starts the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Because it is not possible, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the variable display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed (first special lottery). (Until the result and the suggestion of the second special lottery result are completed), it is put on hold. Specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 by the first starting port sensor 2104, and the second starting port sensor 2551. The second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special) are stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. The number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, respectively, and for more than that, games are played in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the ball is accepted, it is not put on hold and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are designed so that the second special random number is preferentially digested. That is, regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the symbol.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above-mentioned eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. It blinks, then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the combination of LEDs lit at the time of this stop suggests a special lottery result.

On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is obtained by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The variable display of the decorative symbol row is started, and then it is stopped and displayed in sequence (in this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed), and finally all the decorative symbol rows are stopped. When it is displayed, the lottery result of the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player side. That is, a plurality of decorative symbol rows change according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) acquired at the time of starting winning. After being displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed is displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). It should be noted that the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is larger than the first special symbol which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates to confirm the image). Is different from the time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left, according to the lottery special lottery result. The middle decoration unit 3050, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[5. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. Specifically, the system / user reset process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the timer interrupt process executed in a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by the timer started by the system / user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the initialization process of the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes an initialization process by executing a main control program. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating the mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and further, "03H" indicating the activation of the watchdog timer is written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit A power failure warning signal is input from. In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the watchdog timer is activated while waiting for the process for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds).

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). .. When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30). ), Proceed to step S24. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag set when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off through normal processing such as the occurrence of a power failure (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted (step). S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff and the checksum in step S48. Compare (verify) with the stored checksum (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( Eliminate (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) (step S30), and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased in step S24. Proceed to.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the bonus ratio may not be correct, so the data stored in the work area for calculating the bonus ratio is deleted (step S26).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 is used. It is preferable to duplicate the data in the backup area, which is determined to be normal first, in the order of 2, N, to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

Regarding the accessory ratio calculation area, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted at predetermined time intervals, separately from the determination result of the check code when the power is turned on. In addition, it is useful for each predetermined operating amount (for example, for each predetermined number of fired balls, for each predetermined number of winning balls, for each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, for each jackpot of a predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.). The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each data type (game control data 13132 and accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136). Erase with conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased. When the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the bonus ratio calculated by the gaming machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. For this reason, the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is prevented from being deleted by the operation of the staff at the game hall. , It is possible to prevent concealment of an abnormal state of the accessory ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been modified to have a high or low bonus ratio.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the initial setting for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting or the RAM initialization process of the RAM work area is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) is initially set and interrupts are permitted. Furthermore, the serial communication port and the test signal output port are initially set. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951 and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Further, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 is started, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initially set.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To generate the power-on command, the power-on state reference command is set as the reference command data, and the command addition data corresponding to the generated command is added.

The power-on command includes a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol / electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command that notifies the game state when the power is restored after the power is turned off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol / electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the gaming machine 1 is completed by the processing from the power-on of the gaming machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure warning signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), that is, the random number update process is executed (step S40). In the random number update process of step S46, a random number other than the random number for determining the winning is mainly updated in the special lottery or the normal lottery. The random number update process for determining the winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery is executed by the timer interrupt process described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure warning signal is detected, and these processes are set as the main process on the main control side (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power cutoff process (power cutoff setting means). In the power outage process, the process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power failure occurs is executed. Specifically, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, the timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption of the time until the main board side power supply cutoff process is completed can be reduced, and the main board side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, it is not necessary to calculate the check code in step S50. The check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated by the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the process when the main board power is turned off.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the work for calculating the accessory ratio (area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) is duplicated in each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time the data is updated) by the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the process when the power supply is turned off on the main board side.

In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the accessory ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is retained even when the power is turned off. , It is possible to calculate the accessory ratio in long-term operation.

Further, a value indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the write of the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S58), and the process waits until the power is restored from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70). The main control board 1310 in the present embodiment has a bank 0 and a bank 1, and is switched and used each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, a detection signal from various sensors that detect a game ball that has entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, and a prize ball control process. The payer ACK signal and the like from the payout control board 951 that conveys that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the above are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer update process (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later, and the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process are determined. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 is lit according to the symbol variation display pattern, the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is output. When determining whether or not an input has been made, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the random number update process 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the small hit, which are updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the system / user reset process (main process on the main control side) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the design is also updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls can be created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 can be performed. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the area for calculating the bonus ratio of the main control built-in RAM 1312 to the area 13128. (See FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped when there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the frame command reception process (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information to convey that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and transmits the above-mentioned transmission information. Store in the information storage area. Further, in the prize ball ejection process, the number of prize balls ejected is recorded in the storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the gaming state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

The area update process for calculating the bonus ratio (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the bonus ball ratio calculation / display process (step S89). ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the count switch that the game ball has entered the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program is used. Creates a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random value. Then, when the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the probability fluctuation state is subsequently performed, and when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game transition to a gaming state other than the probability variation state is performed. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" means a state in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" Ordinary lottery "). Then, it is determined whether or not to open / close the second start opening door member 2549 according to the lottery result by the ordinary lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be accepted by the starting winning opening 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the game state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the prize ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the prize ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the prize ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25). Is called, and the bonus ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the bonus ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the bonus ratio, the bonus ratio (gambling of the gaming machine 1) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

If the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, regardless of whether the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed. You may. Further, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It may be displayed. Since the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is provided on the back surface side of the game board, if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. is doing. In this way, if the bonus ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, the CPU resource is not consumed by the division or subtraction for calculating the bonus ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation / display process will be described later in FIGS. 24 and 25. Further, a specific example of the display method of the accessory ratio will be described later. When the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but the bonus ratio display switch 1318 may be used. Only the displayed value may be calculated for each operation. Further, the bonus ratio is calculated regardless of whether the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317. It may be displayed.

Even when the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, the area update process for calculating the bonus ratio (step S81) and the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S89) are executed. By executing these processes regardless of whether or not the fraud is detected, the accessory ratio can be confirmed even during the fraud notification.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in this state, a drive signal may be output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening / closing member 2107 of the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, and normal symbol display information output. Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as signals, time-saving and medium-time information output information, and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 951.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal for output to the inspection device connected to the gaming machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. Various commands created by the timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, are stored in the transmission information. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And the sum value calculated by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation processing of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in the timer interrupt processing, and the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 is the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus. The calculation process of the object ratio may be executed. In this case, a command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command to the peripheral control unit 1511. You may send a command to display the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio.

[5-3. Character ratio calculation / display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation / display process. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, if the calculated bonus ratio is within (or out of) a predetermined range, the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the advance notice effect may be changed to perform a notice effect that is more interesting than the normal advance notice effect.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the main area is normal, so the bonus ratio calculation process is executed and the combination is obtained from the data in the main area. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the bonus ratio is calculated by the number of winning balls divided by the total number of acquired balls, and the continuous bonus ratio is calculated by the number of consecutive winning balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The fractional part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio may be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S156, the updated value may be duplicated in the backup area every time the bonus ratio and / or the continuous bonus ratio of the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

When the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted in the calculation of the bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio is divided. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, when the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8-bit or 16-bit operations, 16 bits below the most significant bit having a value of 1 are extracted from the acquired spheres stored in 32 bits for operation. It is good to store it in a register (16 bits) and divide it. When the number of acquired balls is equal to or less than the maximum number of bits that can be used in the calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be taken out and used in the calculation.

Further, if the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100 (rounded down to the nearest whole number) and used as the number to be divided (the number to be divided) to calculate the bonus ratio, the calculation with a decimal number can be avoided.

Further, the upper limit of the bonus ratio may be set to 99, and if the calculation result of the bonus ratio is 100 or more, it may be 99.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 1. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 1 is duplicated in the main area (step S148). ), The bonus ratio calculation process is executed, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 2 is duplicated in the main area (step S154). ), The bonus ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read out, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there is another backup area, it is similarly determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all the backup areas are abnormal, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) is initialized and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the RAM 1312 in the initialization process because the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated when the main board side power is turned off. The backed up data is initialized, but if the check code is periodically calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, even if the power of the pachinko machine is turned on again, the accessory ratio calculation work area This is because the data in (the area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, 1 is added to the backup area distribution counter value and updated (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area distribution counter value is odd (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is odd, the data in the main area is duplicated in the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is duplicated in the backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the copy destination of the data in the main area by the backup area distribution counter value and writing the data to only a part of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas.

When three or more backup areas are provided, the backup area for writing data may be distributed by the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area distribution counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory ratio and the calculated value, the data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio display 1317 is acquired by referring to the conversion table (not shown). The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of the bonus ratio is the bonus ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated bonus ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the last two digits.

The bonus ratio calculation process (step S156) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the data of the number of acquired balls from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the bonus ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). , Data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processes of steps S156 and S172 are configured by the common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Data can be written in the storage area of the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio.

As explained above, since the data for calculating the accessory ratio is duplicated in the backup area in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, it is useful when normal power failure processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset or the like. Data for calculating the object ratio can be protected.

Since the processes of steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of the gaming machine, it is preferable to configure one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the data check and backup methods differ depending on the model. However, if the data check and backup methods are standardized among the models, they may be placed in the common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Subsequently, the arrangement of the program and the data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in ROM 1313 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The ROM 1313 contains the game control code 13131, the game control data 13132, the debug (inspection function) code 13133, the debug (inspection function) data 13134, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135, and the accessory ratio calculation / display. Contains an area for storing data 13136. The ROM 1313 of the present embodiment contains a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the game machine 1, such as a game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of game machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. And, the bonus ratio calculation area (third storage area) that stores programs used for the purpose of calculating the bonus ratio, such as the bonus ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136. Is assigned.

A free area of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area is used. It can be easily distinguished from the debug (inspection function) area. Similarly, a free area of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135, and is displayed in a dump list format. In this case, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. The value stored in the free area may be a fixed value which is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game area and the debug area or a value having a low frequency. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Further, even if the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area are not separated and the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 are stored in a part of the debug area. good. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, the character ratio calculation area (the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the character), which is a process that is not directly related to the control of the progress of the game, is used. The ratio calculation / display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that a defect (bug or the like) of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 affects the game control.

The debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data that are not directly related to the game. For example, various functions used only when debugging the game machine 1 other than the game control of the game machine 1. The code for outputting the inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) codes are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. Further, in the bonus ratio calculation area, a program for the purpose of calculating the bonus ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored.

Further, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read / written to / from the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be executed. As described above, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be called from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio calculation / display code is stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 The inspection can be performed separately from the above inspection, and the time and effort required for the inspection of the gaming machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. .. The backup area may be one or more. A check code for detecting an error in data is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or the power cutoff process on the main control side (Fig.). It may be set in step S50 to step S54) of 22. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power cutoff process (step S50 in FIG. 20). You may set it. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set for the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

If it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the process of power off on the main control side, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, the updated data may be duplicated in the backup area every time the value in the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The data of the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) timed by the main control MPU 1311, and the accessory ratio calculation process (step of FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. It is read out in S156). In this way, the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the acquired ball number data from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) reads the acquired ball number data in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. By writing, the game control program and the program that executes the character ratio calculation / display processing can be completely separated, and the program for the character ratio calculation / display processing can be standardized even for game machines with different specifications. ..

In the bonus ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process, the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are used as the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. The calculated bonus / continuous bonus ratio data is read out in the bonus ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process when displaying the bonus ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 27 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest way. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. The number of winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in an operating accessory (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the opening is open, and the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open). be. The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a winning character while the character is continuously operating (for example, the winning opening is open in the big hit consecutive chan). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of winning balls by the total number of winning balls. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of consecutive bonus balls by the total number of winning balls. The number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ball ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt process. Stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls correspond to the total cumulative total of FIG. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numerical values up to 167727215 or 249497295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total acquisition balls. When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all the data moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of winning balls, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of big hits of the special symbol variation display game, etc.) becomes a predetermined number, You may move the write pointer.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. Also, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the bonus ratio using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the bonus ratio calculated from the cumulative value and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Therefore, even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to make a round of the ring buffer and write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

Among the structures of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27 (A). The number of other winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize other than the accessory (a winning opening that does not open and close, for example, a general winning opening 2001). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. As for the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, and the total number of winning balls, the data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the bonus ratio and the continuous winning combination are obtained. The object ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (C), more detailed data can be acquired than that shown in FIG. , Others The number of winning openings, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls of special electric accessory, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol fluctuation display games, the number of big hits of special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number. You may move the write pointer to.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer makes a round. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C), the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, and the normal electric bonus winning balls. The number, the number of balls acquired for the special electric accessory, the number of balls acquired for the starting opening, and the number of balls acquired for the other winning openings are each a 2-byte storage area, and a numerical value up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. Number of winning balls, number of other winning balls, number of continuous winning balls, total number of winning balls, number of normal electric bonus winning balls, number of special electric bonus winning balls, number of starting opening winning balls and other winning opening winning balls The cumulative number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store numbers up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the total of the data for 6000 prize balls x n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. Number of winning balls for bonuses, number of other winning balls, number of winning balls for continuous bonuses, total number of winning balls, bonus ratio, ratio of continuous bonuses, number of balls for regular electric bonuses, number of balls for special electric bonuses, starting point The total number of acquired balls and the total number of other winning openings won is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and a numerical value up to 167727215 or 42949677295 can be stored in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the cumulative total and the cumulative total of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 27 (C), the total number of acquired balls, the bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27 (B). The number of other winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize other than the accessory (the winning opening that does not open and close). The number of balls acquired for the ordinary electric accessory is the prize ball acquired by winning a prize in the ordinary electric accessory (the second starting opening 2004 in which the second starting opening door member 2549 is open) that is operating according to the result of the lottery by the ordinary symbol. It is a number. The number of balls acquired for the special electric accessory is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the special electric accessory (for example, the opening large winning openings 2005, 2006) that is operating according to the result of the lottery by the special symbol. The number of balls acquired at the starting opening is the number of winning balls acquired by winning a prize at the starting winning opening (first starting opening 2002). The number of winning balls in other winning openings is the number of winning balls acquired by winning a prize in a winning opening (general winning opening 2001) that is not a bonus (does not operate) and does not trigger a lottery of special symbols. The number of balls acquired for the normal electric accessory, the number of balls acquired for the special electric accessory, the number of balls acquired for the starting opening, the number of balls acquired for the other winning openings, the number of balls acquired for the continuous accessory, and the total number of acquired balls are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. The data is not erased at the opportunity of. Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, January, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIGS. 25 (B) and 25 (C) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

In addition, the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated accessory ratio are abnormal values (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , Number of acquired balls for bonuses> Total number of acquired balls, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, when the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the value is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Configuration of accessory ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 is composed of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed together in one package, but both may be housed in different packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 and a signal for setting the operating state of the accessory ratio display 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating the data acquisition timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit a signal for lighting each LED element (7-segment and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit control signals indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signal transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp is. The direction of the signal (current) shown differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is an anode common type or a cathode common type, but an example of the anode common type is shown.

A resistor 13174 that determines the current value to be passed through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the emission brightness of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, an 8-bit data latch 3173A to D, an 8 × 4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2 × 8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, and a driver 3179. It has a latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, a Digit-Limit control unit 3181, a duty ratio control unit 3182, a data selector control unit 3183, a standby mode control unit 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds the data for 16 bits, and sends the data as parallel data to the 16-bit data latch 3172. The 4 bits of D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 35), and the 4 bits of D11 to D8 are data for selecting the register corresponding to the operation mode. (See FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are the data of the detailed settings.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and controls D15 to D8 in each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). It sends to unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184), and sends D7 to D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). Further, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects an 8-bit data latch 3173 for storing display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180 has data register 0, that is, 8 bits of Digit-A. It sends a signal to select the 8-bit data latch 3173 so that the data latch 3173A stores the data.

The 8-bit data latch 3173 is provided as many as the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED is captured. Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

The 8x4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends the data to the decoder 3175 and the 2x8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses the character generator decode table (see FIG. 34) to convert the input data into characters to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

The 2x8 data selector 3176 refers to the decoding settings and selects the data from the decoder 3175 if it is set to a mode that uses a decoder, and 8x if it is set to a mode that does not use a decoder. 4 Select the data from the data selector 3174. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

The constant current driver 3178 uses the data from the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to output a current signal for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

The driver 3179 receives a sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. By controlling the current suction timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3 by the driver 3179, which 7-segment LED (digit) is displayed is determined.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of lit digits from 1 to 4 by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to XXX0011B, all four digits are used in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Is written. Note that x indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio when lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, D15 to D8 are set to 0010000B, and by inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 has 16 steps of duty from 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the decoder settings. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001 ××××B, the setting for using the decoder is written in the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000XX. By inputting the data set to XXB, the NO DECODER setting that does not use the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and 2 when the decoder is not used. The × 8 data selector 3176 controls to select data from the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the standby mode setting and the data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by setting from the outside. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In the standby mode, the setting at that time is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Further, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all the data held inside by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all the data held in the registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 produces the clock used in driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 31A shows the main control board box 1320 of mounting example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and the model number of the main control board 1310 is displayed on the surface thereof. (Seal sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) and opening sticker are stuck. The opening seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

The mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31 (B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In mounting example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are in the same direction.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320 and constitutes the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that no improper modification has been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that no improper modification has been made by not arranging the parts around the main control MPU 1311.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 or the model number display of 1320 on the main control board box. Further, it may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are in the same direction. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the game machine in a horizontally long orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are in the same direction. It is advisable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to be. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the game machine in a vertically long direction, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. It is advisable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to face each other.

Further, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for drawing out the signal line from the main control board 1310 are end portions (upper length in the figure) along the long side of the main control board 1310 in a direction in which the lengths of the connectors are aligned with the accessory ratio indicator 1317. It is the upper end along the side, but it may be mounted on the lower end along the lower long side or the end along the left and right sides). That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged at a position where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and does not interfere with the visibility of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. ..

Further, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached to positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

By mounting the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in this way, the model number display of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct orientation, improving their visibility and improving the visibility in the manufacturing process and the amusement park. Even in the inspection after installation, it is possible to confirm the ratio of accessories and the presence or absence of modification of the main control MPU 1311 without taking an unreasonable posture.

In another mounting example shown in FIG. 31C, the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted so as to be in the same direction, but the circuit other than the main control MPU 1311 is used. The direction of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the direction of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the direction of the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping with the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal affixed to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are less important when inspecting for unauthorized modification, and therefore it is of little significance to make the orientations arranged on the main control board 1310 the same.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may have an unstable signal due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close as possible.

For example, as shown in the figure, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). Arrange so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 is larger than L2.

Further, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 in order to easily confirm from the outside that no inappropriate modification has been made, as shown by the dotted line. Therefore, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or another package, and in either case, L1 is mounted so as to be larger than L2.

32 (B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another mounting example, and FIG. 32 (C) is a diagram showing the mounting example shown in FIG. 32 (B). It is sectional drawing of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 32 (B), ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 in which no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and the inner layer of the signal line 13101. A ground pattern 13107 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern may be provided on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106.

Explaining the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13103 for supplying the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 are arranged. Arranged so as not to intersect). Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer by the through hole 13105. Also in this case, the signal line 13104 is arranged avoiding the prohibited area 13106 (that is, so that the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not intersect).

The main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board having a pattern on the front surface and the back surface and having no inner layer from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification. It can also be applied to a multilayer substrate having an inner layer (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 0010000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for setting the duty ratio, and is written in the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence / absence of decoding and the number of display digits are set. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence / absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits, and is decoded by the data selector control unit 3183. It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, and the data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written to the data register in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

The duty ratio, the presence / absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the registers described above do not need to be set each time the accessory ratio is displayed, and may be set once. Therefore, the initial settings are made in step S28 of FIG. Is set as. If the initial setting is set only once, the setting may be changed due to the influence of noise or the like after the initial setting. Therefore, a switching button is displayed every time the opening of the main body frame 4 is detected. It may be reset every time (is pressed). As a result, even if the setting is switched due to noise, the correct display can always be performed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decode table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert the input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decode table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Further, when displaying numbers, since D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states, that is, an initial state, a data input completed state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). Is being prepared.

In order to control these five states, there are blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby mode setting instructions. The blank instruction cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation instruction displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after the completion of each setting. If a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write instruction sets the number of digits used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. Select the register to write data in D11 to D8, and input the contents to be set in the register in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all-lighting instruction turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side, and lights all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby instruction is divided into two according to the parameters, and there are a standby instruction that transitions to the standby state and a clear instruction that transitions to the initial state. The standby instruction maintains the setting at that time, stops the operation of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. In addition, the clear instruction clears and initializes all the data held in the register or latch, and the display is also turned off.

Since the blank instruction is also a kind of display instruction, in the present specification, "display" includes any state of all lighting of the 7-segment LED, lighting of some segments, and all extinguishing.

A display example in each of the above-mentioned states will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 is not completed or the display data is not set, so that the initial state (ALL BLANK) is set. As shown in FIG. 36 (A), the 7-segment LED 13172 All segments of are turned off and are not lit. Further, since the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, it is preferable to set the standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the game machine.

Then, after the control data is set in the various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 and the initial setting is completed, the display data is input, and the 7-segment LED 13172 displays a predetermined display. As shown in FIG. 36B, this predetermined display may display "-" in all digits or light all segments. It is preferable that the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is advisable to display a predetermined value on all the digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED lighting state (lighting according to the input data) is set. Specifically, the accessory ratio display state is set, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED13172, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. If the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display it so that it can be identified. For example, all digits (or numbers) are blinked and displayed, and the decimal point is lit or blinked.

Further, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, another type of accessory ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, it is preferable to display the display so as to be able to identify that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, as described above. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36 (E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is recommended to turn off the lights to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This bonus ratio non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed, but may be a different mode and may be a mode that can be distinguished from the bonus ratio display.

FIG. 36 (E) is a display example in which the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 have an abnormality and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormal display may be in a mode different from that shown in the figure, and may be a mode that can be distinguished from the normal bonus display in order to show that the bonus ratio display is not possible.

Further, when the all lighting command is input in any of the states, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned on. Further, when a blank instruction or a standby instruction is input in any of the states, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while retaining the data. Further, when a data clear command is input in any of the states, all the data held in the register or the latch is cleared, all the segments of the 7-segment LED13172 are turned on, and the initial state is restored.

[8. Display of character ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be described.

As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and a liquid crystal display device, displays the value of the accessory ratio in the last 2 digits, and the type of the numerical value in the first 2 digits. Is displayed.

Further, the accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, it is advisable to alternately display the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value.

The display mode of the numerical value of the bonus ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the comparison result between the bonus ratio and the predetermined reference value. For example, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, when the reference is exceeded, red, etc.) is displayed. By changing the display mode according to the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may be composed of one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and the predetermined reference value is displayed in different modes. For example, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. If the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it lights up, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold, it blinks.

When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, it may be displayed in a different display mode (display color) depending on the display content (characteristic ratio or continuous character ratio, latest data display, medium-term data display, etc.).

Also, if the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of prize ball data is short and the value of the bonus ratio may not have converged, so it is displayed in a different display mode (display color, blinking, etc.). You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when the total number of acquired balls exceeds the above-mentioned reference value.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch between the latest data display, the medium-term data display, and the long-term data display. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated by using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C). The medium-term data display is a bonus ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C). The long-term data display is a bonus ratio calculated using the total cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C).

The accessory ratio display 1317 may also be used in the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 has been released. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. The display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, but it is preferable that the progress of the game is continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the display of the bonus ratio can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, if the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the accessory ratio is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the fluctuation display for the remaining time may be performed. can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variation display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, it can be configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display a value other than the accessory ratio. For example, the number of prizes won or the number of prize balls paid out for each type of prize opening per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the normal ball output rate excluding the special prize (during the big hit), and can be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls. The number of launch balls (number of out balls) is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020. As described above, the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exits (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game ball from the ball launcher to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out balls may be detected by the discharge ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball discharged from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). Further, an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) for detecting a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the lower part of the game area 5a is provided, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 is determined. The number of out balls may be detected by the total of the number of game balls detected by the start opening sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. Further, a launch supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball supplied to the ball launcher 680, and a game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 but not reaching the game area 5a (so-called foul ball). A foul ball sensor (not shown) is provided to detect foul balls, and the number of foul balls is subtracted from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launcher 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor to obtain the number of out balls (number of launch balls). It may be detected.

The number of out balls may be counted by any of the above-mentioned methods. That is, among the illustrated sensors, it is sufficient if either the discharge ball sensor 3060 or the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided.

In addition, the number of safe balls is equal to the number of prize balls paid out. Further, the base may be defined as the ball output rate for each game state (during normal game, during electric support, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and may be calculated by the number of safe balls / the number of out balls for each game state. .. By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, it is possible to check the deviation from the design value of the ball ejection performance during operation on the spot for each gaming machine. In addition, since the ball ejection performance can be confirmed without using a hall controller, it becomes easy to inspect each gaming machine at the time of on-site inspection of the game hall.

The accessory ratio display 1317 has information on other prizes and prize balls in the base (the number of prizes in the general prize opening 2001 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, the number of prizes in the starting prize opening 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the prize). , The number of prizes in the big prize openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls due to the prize, etc.) may be displayed.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, or may display the accessory ratio by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318. For example, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio is started, and after displaying for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. You may. That is, even if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is open, the accessory ratio display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, the display content may be changed for each operation of the accessory ratio display switch 1318. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the accessory ratio (cumulative), is displayed in the first two digits, and a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is displayed. The prize ratio to is displayed in the last two digits. When the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits switches to A6, which means the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and the continuous bonus ratio to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls. May be displayed in the last two digits (FIG. 37 (B)). Furthermore, when the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the bonus ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the first two digits, and the bonus ratio based on the latest data is displayed in the last two digits (latest data). Display) (FIG. 37 (C)). When the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits switches to y6, which means the bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is lowered. It may be displayed in two digits (medium-term data display) (FIG. 37 (D)).

The accessory ratio display switch 1318 may not be provided as an independent switch, but may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a bonus ratio display switch 1318 when operated during the operation of the gaming machine 1. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the accessory ratio display switch 1318 into one switch, the number of switches operated by the staff in the amusement park becomes one, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the operating gaming machine and confirm the gambling of the operating gaming machine.

In addition, the data of the number of prize balls is accumulated as the data for calculating / displaying the prize ball 13136, and when the check code is abnormal, the data for calculating / displaying the prize ratio 13136 is deleted, so that the wrong character ratio is displayed. Can be avoided.

In addition, since the data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the deletion condition of the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the data of the accurate number of prize balls is retained. , You can calculate the exact prize ratio.

In addition, since the data for calculating / displaying the accessory ratio 13136 is not deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the data 13136 for calculating / displaying the accessory ratio is not accidentally deleted by the operation of the staff of the game hall. Since the data for calculating and displaying the object ratio is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by the erroneous operation of the staff of the game hall. Further, since the playground cannot intentionally erase the data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved, and it is possible to prevent the concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is high.

[9. View base]
[9-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
Up to this point, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a bonus ratio has been described. Next, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value exclusively will be described, but the accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004), a lottery is performed by a random number and a special symbol variation display game is executed. do. The fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation display game is a fluctuation pattern of a relatively short time (normal fluctuation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened fluctuation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easily selected when the number of holdings is large). Or, there is a fluctuation pattern over a relatively long time (a fluctuation pattern such as super reach exceeding 1 minute). When calculating the base value with a pachinko machine, the notification of the base value is less urgent than the notification of the error, so that the notification can be made at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is switched to the next variation display game. However, if the variable display time is long, the number of out balls (number of launched balls) and the number of prize balls (paid balls) are met when certain conditions are met without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game. It is better to calculate the base value and update the display when the number) changes). Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, even in the special symbol variation display game) (for example, the number of out balls (number of launch balls) or the number of prize balls (number of payout balls)). ) Changes), the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of a pachinko machine that performs such an operation will be described.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing a configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by reference numeral 1317 is not a bonus ratio display but a base display. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may use, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIGS. 4 and 28, and may have another number of digits (for example, 2 digits). A 7-segment LED may be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the area update process (step S81) for calculating the accessory ratio in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated and displayed. In the following description, "area update process for calculating accessory ratio" in step S81 of FIG. 23 is read as "area update process for base calculation", and "calculation / display process for accessory ratio" in step S89 is "base". It will be explained by replacing it with "calculation / display processing". Further, the "character ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is read as "base calculation area 13128", and the "character ratio calculation / display code 13135" is read as "base calculation / display code 13135". "Data for calculating / displaying accessory ratio 13136" will be replaced with "Data for calculating / displaying 13136".

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls is calculated using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value each time for each timer interrupt cycle. Is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The fact that the game state is in the special prize means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can win many prize balls, but even if the opening and ending times of the big hit game are included. good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning opening and the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction.

Further, in the start winning openings 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric support. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric support, a ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 2004 is detected as an out ball for a predetermined time after opening and closing of the starting winning opening 2004 (for example, a ball that has won the starting winning opening). You may include the period up to (a few seconds required) in the special prize.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can be divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, the special prizes related to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 in the gaming machine of this embodiment are during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending). Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and out balls other than during the special prize, the normal (so-called big hit) prizes to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are not used to calculate the base value. On the other hand, in the starting winning opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having the opening / closing member, the winning balls and the winning balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (large winning openings 2005, 2006) are calculated based on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls regardless of the playing state (whether or not the special prize is in progress). Not used, other prizes (starting winning opening 2004) switch whether to use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the calculation of the base value or not, depending on the game state (whether or not the special prize is in progress). Will be. Not using the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value means that the paid out prize balls are not counted in the in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value). Even if a winning signal is input, it also includes not creating edge information for paying out the winning ball by the winning signal.

Further, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. Generally, small hits occur during a short time, and since it is open for a short time, it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated except during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during the time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and the winning balls to the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated other than during the special prize may be used for the calculation of the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to the standard of the base value, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 sends a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a report of the completion of payout from the payout control board 951. This variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls won the starting prize openings 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit, and even if the winning to the starting winning opening is not suspended, the prize balls are paid out, so the total number of prize balls is updated. To. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning is not generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is large. Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, or the like, and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, it is out. Acquire the number of balls = 1. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. You can judge whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted from the main control board 1310, or a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 from the payout control unit 952. May be sent.

Further, even if information on both the winning and the out-balls to the winning opening is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the number of winning balls becomes the total number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Add and add the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (or the out ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). Further, even if information on winning a prize to a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of prize balls due to the plurality of winnings is the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 5 prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 3 winning balls, a total of 8 prize balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or, add to the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the launch of the game ball is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is operating (furthermore, the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Further, when the player is operating the firing handle, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the palm or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is the total prize ball number ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or fraudulent act of detecting the prize ball when the game ball is not fired, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate display of the base value. Further, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the base was calculated by excluding the number of prize balls during the special prize and the number of out balls. Then, the number of out balls may be counted by excluding the number of balls that have won the big prize opening, and the base value may be calculated.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but it is not necessary to calculate the base value. Furthermore, if an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, if the total number of winning balls is larger than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value should not be calculated. May be good. When expressing the base value as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls ÷ the total number of out balls by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217.

A predetermined number to be multiplied by the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated up to the first decimal place in parts per 100, and less than a decimal number is not calculated. If this predetermined number is 10000, the base value is calculated in parts per 100 to two decimal places. That is, by dividing the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit by 100, the base value of a fraction of two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. During the wait time of 32 clocks from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 waits for other processing even if it waits without performing processing. May be done. For example, a random number for determining a big hit may be updated between writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and reading data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or the signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the wait time Hard random numbers are also updated.

That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processes related to the game include at least a process of updating a random number for determining a win. Further, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the random numbers that affect the result of the game are updated one or more times.

Further, when the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or notify an abnormality of the base value. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages.

There are various methods for base notification, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may be used to notify the base value at all times or at a predetermined timing. By notifying the player of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in the accessory ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display device or display device. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 composed of the 7-segment LED, the main control MPU 1311 inputs the display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the digit for displaying the numerical value in D15 to D8 in the "data n setting", and the display content is specified in D7 to D0. Is generated and written to the shift register 3171.

When displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) may be provided for the base value, and if the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. .. For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, when the standard is exceeded, red, etc.) is displayed. Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed with different emission colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, self-deprecating comments may be displayed when the base value is low, such as "I like it", "I'm feeling down", "It's not bad", "It's amazing in a sense", etc. at each stage. If the base value exceeds the standard value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud has been performed. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a manner that indicates a warning such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to the weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, the same means that at least one of the display, the lamp, and the sound is the same.

In addition, various lamps, liquid crystal displays, sounds, and the like may notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.). Further, when the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command for displaying the base notification failure on the liquid crystal display device may be generated. By transmitting the notification command to the generated sub-board, the state of the base can be notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-board, so that a wider variety of notifications can be made than the main board, and the load on the main board can be increased. Can be reduced. Further, by notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between the failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of the base value to be displayed. Further, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to know the abnormality of the base value without looking at the back surface side of the game board provided with the base display 1317.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 may be used for constant notification. Further, it may be notified at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not executed, and when the special symbol variation display game ends).

The base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park. In this case, the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls, for each predetermined number of out balls) as in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, etc.) described later. good.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary signal (high, low) indicating whether the calculated base value is high or low with respect to a predetermined threshold value. Further, a signal having a length indicating an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, a pulse having a base value of 30% or more and less than 40% is a pulse of 30 milliseconds). Further, a number of continuous pulses indicating an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

Even if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may be generated, and if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may not be generated. The display of the base value continues even if the base notification command is not generated.

Further, as will be described later in FIG. 56 and the like, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal, a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value is generated, and the player or the hall employee is notified of the abnormality of the base. It may be notified.

Further, it may be determined whether to notify the player of the base according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the base value is constantly notified to the player, the player's attention to the production of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be distracted, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Is.

Further, the effect of the special symbol variation display game being executed or executed in the future may be changed based on the calculated base value. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select an effect from display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) that differ depending on the base value.

Further, during the special symbol variation display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%). Therefore, when the threshold value is exceeded or falls during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. The effect may be changed in the same manner or the effect may be changed in different ways depending on whether the base value rises above a predetermined threshold value or falls.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area update process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation / display process in step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and is used for base calculation. The prize ball number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). After that, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89), and the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits the payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. Of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. do not have. On the other hand, when the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. No need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine at an early stage. For example, when it is determined that the base is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol fluctuation display game, and the base value moves up and down across the predetermined threshold value and becomes abnormal. Even if it is determined to be, the game is not stopped, and the calculation process of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the determination of abnormality. For example, there are short-term games such as normal fluctuations and long-term games such as reach fluctuations in special symbol fluctuation display games, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol fluctuation display game. When the conditions to be satisfied are satisfied multiple times, the base value should be calculated each time, and the base value should be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variation display game is restricted (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variation display), the change of the base value may be long depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because the hall may be inconvenienced because the information necessary for operating the hall is not output at an appropriate timing without noticing the time.

Also, if the fired game ball has not won a prize in the starting prize opening or the general winning opening, the base value will decrease. In this state, the player is losing money, so for example, an additional effect (for example, an effect related to a win that is not related to a change in the base value, or an effect related to a change in the base value) appears in addition to the effect performed on the liquid crystal display. A notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit (a notice effect with a high expectation such as the next notice effect among the effects not related to the change of the base value, or a change of the base value) Of the specific effects that appear, a notice effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, the base value is displayed in a rainbow display) may be performed. As a result, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning the starting opening and the general winning opening, and can motivate the player to continue the game.

On the other hand, if many of the fired game balls win the starting prize opening or the general winning opening (if more than the average value of the past winning numbers), the base value will increase. In this state, even if the result of the big hit lottery is wrong, the player is paid out more game balls than usual, so that the player's disappointment is reduced. The effect of the variable display game may be changed to an effect with a low degree of expectation.

[9-2. Variations in the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value]
Next, variations in the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. The outline of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・ Figure 41: Prize ball number calculation → Prize ball number update → Base value calculation → Payout command transmission ・ Figure 42: Prize ball number calculation → Prize ball number update → Payout command transmission → Base value calculation ・ Figure 43: Prize ball number calculation → Send payout command → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value ・ Figure 44: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Confirm receipt of the command → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value ・ Figure 45: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Notification of completion of payout → Update of number of prize balls → Calculation of base value The variations of FIGS. 41 to 44 are described later in addition to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40. It can be applied to any of the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation / display processing.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the position shown in the figure, and the base ratio is calculated after the output data setting process (step S90). -Execute the display process (step S89).

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. After that, the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits the payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89) are performed after the output data setting process (step S90). To execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base ratio is calculated. The base value is updated in the display process (step S89). The prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted) instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits the payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

Since the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830, the base calculation area update process ( The order with step S81) and base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits the payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation is received (step S81). Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, since the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the command reception from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, but the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits the payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the total number of prize balls (or, in the embodiment described later) is the number of prize balls for which the payout is completed in the base calculation area update process (step S81). The prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, since the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310. Therefore, although it is necessary to notify the completion of ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used for calculating the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the process shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 43, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout command is transmitted. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the receipt of the payout command is confirmed. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of the prize balls is completed.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls during the special prize cannot be accurately counted due to the difference between the timing of determining whether the gaming state is in the special prize and the timing of updating the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem becomes greater when the time from winning a prize to the winning opening to updating the number of prize balls is long. Therefore, a flag is attached to the prize during the special prize, and the flag is inherited in the number of prize balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification by the prize. Then, using the flag, it is determined whether or not the prize ball is a special prize at each stage. By doing so, even if it takes a long time from winning the prize to the prize opening to updating the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these opportunities, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known for the gaming machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be shortened, and the gaming machine can be efficiently manufactured.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which the winning is detected is not yet obtained. Add to the number of payout balls. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of unpaid balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the prize ball number to be paid out is calculated. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening where the winning is detected. Is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Even if the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, a payout command is transmitted and the number of unpaid balls is held by the payout control board 951. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the payout command is transmitted.

Further, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of prize balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In addition, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

Further, as will be described later in FIG. 47, without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1, every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winning, or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , Steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As explained above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings, but when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay and the base display 1317 is displayed in real time. The base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 39 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 46 and Fig. 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls-Fig. 48 and Fig. 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls Calculation ・ Fig. 50 and Fig. 51: The base value is updated when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 46, the same step number is assigned to the same portion as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process (FIG. 39), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. If the game state is in the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there are prize balls, that is, whether the number of acquired prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there is no prize ball, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls corresponds to winning 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls in a large number of prize balls (for example, the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the starting winning opening) at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. For example, when a prize ball) has been obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages. If the number of prize balls is abnormal, the acquired number of prize balls does not have to be added to the prize ball number buffer in step S813, and the number of prize balls added to the prize ball number buffer in step S813 is subtracted. May be good.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player and the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, a sound, or the like. Further, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park. Further, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal in the calculation of the base value. In this case, the prize ball may be paid out to the player. Further, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and the notification is performed by the above-mentioned notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display device, information output from the external terminal plate 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal is determined. It may be used to calculate the base value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all the data of the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, in the initial state, the game is started from the operation check. As another method of stopping the game, the game is temporarily stopped (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped), and then the error notification is stopped, the game returns to the original state, and the game is restarted. Therefore, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a decrease in the power supply voltage, the power failure detection signal is output, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 to stop the game. Then, after the error notification is completed, the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is restarted. At this time, since the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 in the same state, the interrupted game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, 100 game balls (that is, out balls) are fired in the game area 5a, and all the game balls may win in the general winning opening or the starting winning opening. It is desirable that the mode of notification is a quiet mode (for example, a lower volume or a lower amount of light than a normal error notification), which is less urgent than a normal error (magnetic sensor error, etc.). Also, the display time may be the same as a normal error or may be shorter. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and the notification may not be performed.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality activated in step S817 has timed up (step S824). Then, when the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is timed up, the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of fired balls. You may. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, it was determined in step S985 whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, but after the number of out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is abnormal in comparison with the number of out balls. (That is, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, when the number of prize balls exceeding the number of out balls is counted in a predetermined time, or considering the number of prize balls in the general winning opening or the starting winning opening, the out balls win at a high rate (for example, 50% or more). For example, if you are doing so.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display process (FIG. 40), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1 may be compared, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), the determination result of comparing the prize ball number and the threshold value Th1 is recorded in the flag, and in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 47), the prize ball number buffer value is set by the flag. May be determined whether or not is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1.

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). That is, if the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than the threshold Th1), the fractional portion of the number of prize balls is used. Remain (leave the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the prize ball number buffer in the prize ball number buffer), store the other parts in the memory (add the threshold value Th1 to the total prize ball number), and use it to calculate the base value. Execute the process to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99, and when 5 prize balls are generated by winning a prize in the general winning opening, the prize ball number buffer value is 104 pieces. However, 100 pieces are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining 4 pieces are left in the prize ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball number buffer is used for the calculation of the base value when the prize ball number buffer value becomes the threshold Th1 or more next time. Further, although the threshold value Th1 = 100 is described, other numerical values such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a jackpot is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed, so the threshold Th1 is less than or equal to the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot (multiple types). If there is a big hit (for example, 4 rounds and 8 rounds of big hits), it is better to set it to the minimum value of the number of prize balls of the big hits or less). Also, from the viewpoint of detecting fraud at an early stage, it is advisable to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable that the threshold value Th1 is 10 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

In addition, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winning without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. Further, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311 or by the output of an RTC (real-time clock).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 is an error (or indefinite), so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Further, when the total number of out balls is 0 or when the calculated base value becomes an abnormal value, the base value may not be calculated and the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated. For example, when the total number of out balls is less than or equal to the total number of prize balls, the base value is 100% or more, and the same number or more prize balls as the number of fired balls (out balls) are obtained, and the game is normally performed. Since it is not in the present state, it is not necessary to store the numerical value in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and calculate the base value. Further, when the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with 1500% as a threshold value. Since the upper limit of the theoretical base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of prize balls of 15 for a winning opening is 1500%, a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value, and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. In this case as well, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, or it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the threshold value for determining the abnormality of the base value may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in the normal operation of the pachinko machine is set, and if it is out of the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is set to the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value without updating.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

As will be described later in FIG. 52, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same. It may be initialized at the timing (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls, every predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is acquired, so that fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage. This is because, during normal games, there is no high probability that a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of launched balls) will win in the general winning openings 2001 and the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004. Therefore, the abnormality of winning in the winning openings (general winning openings 2001 and starting winning openings 2002, 2004) that are always open is determined and notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, since the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each prize ball). The load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Will be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the number of out balls is recorded in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 48, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball as a result of the determination in step S812, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For this reason, for example, when it is determined that a game ball wins a prize at the start winning opening to generate a look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode different from the usual mode (blinking display, red hold, etc.). , The player expects the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-read hold to be a big hit, but the player is discouraged if the special symbol variation display game is lost. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in the present embodiment, the disappointment of the player as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing at which the prize ball is generated, so that the base value increased by the prize ball due to winning the winning opening is notified. That is, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed at the time of winning the starting winning opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning the starting winning opening is added, the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1 = 100). ) Is not reached, the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should increase (only the lower numerical value changes due to the number of displayed digits, and the display may not change). Therefore, even if the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is out of order, the player thinks that the base value will rise later (that is, the condition is good), and the decline in the interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value does not reach the predetermined number (threshold value Th1). Further, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. ..

The player may be able to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate without delay. For example, it is possible to select by the operation button 220C at the start of the game. Further, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is decided to perform the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to execute the effect capable of notifying the delay of the calculation of the base value. If the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery will not be executed even if the starting prize opening is won. Even in this case, since the prize balls are paid out along with the winning of the starting prize opening, the number of the prize balls is counted and used for the calculation of the base value. In addition, even if you win a prize in the starting prize opening or general winning opening at the time of a specific error, if it is treated as if there was no prize and the prize ball is not paid out, the number of prize balls will not be counted and it will be based on the prize. The value is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the number of out balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of out balls is configured with 8 bits. , If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 48), the determination result of comparing the number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 49), the number of out balls is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether or not it is equal to or higher than the threshold value Th2 of.

If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out-ball number (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball number buffer (step S900). In addition, steps S899 and S900 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out-ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th2.

After that, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are set at the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize). It may be initialized for each number of balls and for each predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, notify the base value by a specific effect, or notify the abnormality of the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (number of launched balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that pursues fun.

In addition, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls each time a prize ball (winning detection, payout command transmission, payout command arrival, prize ball payout completion, etc.) is performed. This is because the base value may not be calculated correctly if it is confirmed whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball) when adding the number of prize balls. For example, even if the firing is not performed for a predetermined time (about 1 minute), the slinging state caused by the game ball being caught by the nail arranged in the game area is eliminated, and the game ball is delayed in the winning opening. This is because there are cases where a prize is won. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

When both the out-ball number and the out-ball number buffer value are smaller than the threshold value Th2, it may be displayed that the out-ball number buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold value Th2, or the out-ball number buffer value may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, since the base value is calculated when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, it is required to calculate the base value rather than calculating the base value every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculation (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Will be done.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , Record the number of out balls in the out ball number buffer. In FIG. 50, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). It should be noted that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or notify an abnormality of the base value. It should be noted that the base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, the base value may be calculated, or the base notification command may not be generated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 is the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process (FIG. 39, FIG. 46, FIG. 47, FIG. 48, which are executed by the main control MPU 1311. It is written in FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.) and read out in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 40, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Further, the data of the prize ball number buffer and the out ball number buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIGS. 46, 48, 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation is performed. -Read by display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (game control program), and the programs for the accessory ratio calculation / display process are standardized even for gaming machines with different specifications. can.

FIG. 52 (A) shows an example of the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the winning ball number buffer, the specific winning ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. The prize ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and is based on the case where the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of prize balls). Is used to calculate. The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out ball number buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of out balls). Be done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in the general winning opening and the starting winning opening. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in a specific general winning opening or starting winning opening. The winning ball number buffer is used when counting the number of out balls by the number of balls passing through the out port (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls fired by the player except during the special prize. The base is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls × 100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, which is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation / display process.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls correspond to each area of the total cumulative total of FIG. 52 (B) described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It is possible to store a numerical value up to 167727215 or 429497295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total cumulative total of the base in FIG. 52 (B) described later, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. It should be noted that a capacity that can record a decimal number of base values may be allocated.

FIG. 52B shows another example of the structure of the work area using the ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52B, the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the winning ball number buffer, the specific winning ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. Each data item is the same as the description in FIG. 52 (A). The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls or for each predetermined time) (for example, for every 6000 prize balls). It is composed of a ring buffer having n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. .. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. When the number of data other than the number of prize balls (number of out balls, predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer may be moved.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. Also, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the base value using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the base is the total number of total prize balls and the total number of out balls. It is a value calculated from the value, and when the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in the cleared area. It will be recalculated. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of all the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the base calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data in one round, the total cumulative value including the original data of the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (B), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each, and numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the total of the data for 6000 prize balls x n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 167727215 or 42949627295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the cumulative total of the base and the total cumulative total are storage areas of 1 byte each, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. It should be noted that a capacity that can record a decimal number of base values may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52 (A), the stored data is not deleted, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted every predetermined period (for example, 1 day, 1 week, January, etc.). good. Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 52 (B) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

Further, when the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, it may be notified that the data of the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the base value may be calculated again.

[9-4. Display base value]
The base value calculated as described above may be continuously displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base display 1317 is visually recognized. Therefore, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. As a matter of course, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation / display process (step S89) are executed.

Further, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the base value is started, the display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the base value may be displayed on the base display 1317. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is advisable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36 (E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , It is good to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This base non-display state has the same mode as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 36 (B)), but may be a different mode and may be a mode that can be distinguished from the displayed base value.

The base display 1317 may also be used by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 has been released. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the display of the base display can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, if the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the base value is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the lapse of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation display for the remaining time can be performed. .. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variation display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base display (accessory ratio indicator) 1317. By doing so, since the base value (role ratio) can be confirmed without opening the main body frame 4, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. Further, in the island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back surface of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a gaming machine, by opening the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, the bases (role ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. Further, when the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form that can be recognized by the player (for example, on a display device for displaying the effect of a special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer for expressing the condition of the pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the base value is calculated by the payout control board 951, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the light amount (luminance) of the base display 1317 is not changed even if the mode is changed to the energy saving mode. This is because if the amount of light of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value by the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening time.

Specifically, the gaming machine of this embodiment is in a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted without the gaming ball winning in any of the winning openings. .. In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs the BGM that is output by the so-called normal fluctuation. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the standby state, the demo state is entered. In the demo state, a video showing the motif of the gaming machine is played, and the gaming machine is explained. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, the amount of light of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced in order to suppress power consumption. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (functional display unit 1400 and base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is not necessary to reduce the light amount of these display devices. May be good. Further, if the amount of light of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, the player who intends to play the game on the vacant table can easily visually recognize the result of the previous lottery.

In addition, even if the game ball does not win in the starting prize opening or the general winning opening, when the game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value is recalculated and updated. there is a possibility. If the number of prize balls does not increase even if the number of out balls is increased after the game balls are fired, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will burn to revenge.

By notifying such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 that also serves as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even if the player shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the player can maintain the light amount before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode or increase the light amount in the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed. It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

Although the maintenance or increase of the light intensity of the display on which the base value is displayed has been described in this way, even if the light intensity of the display on which the base value is displayed is lowered or turned off with an emphasis on the viewpoint of reducing energy consumption. good. For example, during the energy saving mode, a predetermined operation (a launch stop button that forcibly stops firing, an effect operation button that changes the effect that appears, a RAM clear button that clears the contents of the RAM, and power to the gaming machine When the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine such as the supply adjustment button for switching the supply / non-supply) is detected, it is preferable to reduce the amount of light of the display on which the base value is displayed. Furthermore, not only in the energy saving mode, but also when the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the light intensity of both the lamp or the like that reduces the power consumption and the display that displays the base value is reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. May be good.

When reducing or turning off the light amount of both the lamp and the display on which the base value is displayed, the light amount of the lamp etc. that reduces power consumption during the energy saving mode is reduced before the display on which the base value is displayed. It may be turned on or off, and in this case, the amount of light from a lamp or the like having a large power consumption is reduced first, and the effect of greatly reducing the power consumption is obtained. Further, the display on which the base value is displayed may be turned off or the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed may be reduced or turned off before the lamp or the like. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine is maintained even in the energy saving mode. It works. Further, during the energy saving mode, the lamp or the like that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time. In this case, the amount of power consumption reduction can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. .. In addition, before and after the time in these explanations (meaning "first" and "simultaneously") includes the order of the timing of internal processing and the order of appearance from the player.

Further, the display mode of the base value may be set to a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. A display for displaying the base value may be configured with a multi-color LED, and the emission color may be changed such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, the display device that displays the base value is configured with a liquid crystal display device, and the base value is low, such as "I like it", "I'm feeling down", "It's not bad", "It's amazing in a sense", etc. Sometimes you may want to display a self-deprecating comment. Further, the effect of adding a comment as described above to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 on which the decorative design is displayed may be executed without changing the display mode of the display device that displays the base value.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of balls passing through the out port]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the process described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out opening, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 54 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 55 and Fig. 56: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the above and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 54 to 56.

When the out ball is detected by the out port passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out port 1111, there is a problem that the number of out balls cannot be accurately counted. This is because the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out from the game area 5a via the general winning opening 2001, the starting winning opening 2002, the large winning opening 2005, and 2006, in addition to the out opening 1111. Therefore, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls launched toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out opening, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided at the lower part of the game area 5a, passes through the out port 1111 and flows out from the game area 5a (out). An out-mouth passing ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of passing balls) is provided. The out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111. By installing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111, it is possible to make the player aware that the out-balls are counted, that is, the base is calculated.

Further, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a gutter in which game balls flowing down from the game area 5a through the out-port 1111 are aligned. If it is installed in a position invisible to the player, it is not necessary to make the player aware of the counting of the out balls. Further, by providing the out port passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out port 1111, it is possible to sufficiently secure a place for arranging the liquid crystal display device and the accessory (movable body), and the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5 is improved. can. Further, in order to prevent double counting of the game balls, the rolling surface on which the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 roll so that the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 do not bounce off. It is good to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 acquires the number of prize balls, the number of balls passing through the out port, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passing through the out port for each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of balls passing through the out opening is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-mentioned base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and a prize is awarded. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , The number of balls passing through the out port is recorded in the out ball number buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 55, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of balls passing through the out port is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of balls passing through the out port is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls buffer (step S821).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 is performed. Then, the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (out ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the out opening and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in another storage area.

Further, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are recorded in different storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when the winning opening is won. The counting of the number of balls passing through the out port and the counting of the number of winning balls are executed at the same time (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the number of out balls buffer and the number of winning balls buffer. At that time, if both the out ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer cannot be updated in one timer interrupt process, whether to count the number of balls passing through the out port with priority or to count the winning ball number with priority. It is better to determine in advance rather than determining by lottery as appropriate. At that time, if the processing related to the prize ball is prioritized over other processing, the processing for paying out the prize ball can be executed quickly, but it may be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). It should be noted that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S896). ). The total of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated out-ball number is the threshold value Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted (step S901). .. It should be noted that steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the number of out balls (out ball number buffer value + winning ball number buffer value) with the threshold value Th2.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls to the number of balls passing through the out port, so that the number of out balls is accurately counted and the base value is calculated accurately. can. Further, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process and the inspection process of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317, and the process of calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Notification of base abnormality]
The process described above generates a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process of determining an abnormality of the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
-Fig. 57: Calculates the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 58: Calculates the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out-balls A pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls, predetermined Although the description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each out ball number is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 57 and 58.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated. As a method for notifying the abnormality of the base, the same method as the above-mentioned notification of the base can be adopted.

For example, one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more may be combined. Specifically, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may be used to notify the abnormality of the base value. By notifying the player of the abnormality of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display device or display device to notify the abnormality of the base value. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

Further, when the base value is displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, abnormally red, etc.) and displayed. Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed with different emission colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage.

In addition, various lamps, liquid crystal displays, sounds, and the like may notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.). The function display unit 1400 may notify the abnormality of the base value. Further, the information on the abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update process to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). It should be noted that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, for example, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 54, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are directly updated using the acquired number of prize balls and out balls. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine and the hall employee can know the state of the gaming machine. It is possible to know the possibility of unauthorized operation on the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to detect and notify an abnormality of a gaming machine that cannot be detected by conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of changes in the base]
Next, an example of a gaming machine that notifies a change in the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by the pachinko machine naturally goes up and down. Since the base value represents the condition of the gaming machine, the player during the game is concerned about the change in the base value as well as the base value itself. Therefore, it is desired to notify the player of the change in the base value. When a display that serves as a guide for the top and bottom of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 59, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the history of the current base value with the history of the past base value. In FIG. 59, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). It should be noted that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the base value management timer has timed up (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed up, it is not the timing to store the base value in the base history, so the base calculation / display process ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer is timed up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record a base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history each time the base value management timer times up. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When a plurality of base histories are stored in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × 10 base values may be stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × n number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are stored. The base value may be calculated as needed.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (Step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is referred to to determine whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the decrease in the base value. (Step S10302). Then, if a predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table during the lowering of the base is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the base reduction, the effect table for which the base reduction is continuing is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not less than (equal to or greater than) the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is reset (step S10305) and the display selection table during base increase is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, in step S10301, it is determined whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value, but the current base value and the base history value are compared to determine whether they are large, equal, or small. You may. The base value is generally a decimal value because it is obtained by division. Therefore, it is advisable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

64 to 68 are views showing an example of a display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select the production of the special symbol variation display game by the random numbers selected in the wake of winning the start winning opening (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is rising or the base value does not change, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected while the base value is decreasing. Be selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the base value decreasing.

Each display selection table includes each item of effect number, effect content, fluctuation time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The content of the production is the name of the production. The fluctuation time is the time from the start to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol due to the effect. The remarks are information that describes the outline of the effect so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

The display selection table 1 (hit 1) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is wrong and the base value is rising or does not change. Is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not derive a probable change state, and the base value is rising or does not change. The display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot that derives a probability variation state, and the base value is increasing or does not change.

The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effects are selected with high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the effect is determined.

If the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease, the effect is selected using the display selection table 3 and the selected effect is selected. You may switch.

Further, it may be determined whether to display a specific effect for notifying the change of the base value according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the player is constantly notified of changes in the base value, the player's attention to the production of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be distracted, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is.

For example, during the execution of the special symbol variation display game (game situation in which the result of the big hit lottery is not shown), the production of the special symbol variation display game is executed with priority, and when it is not variable, the base value is increased. It is advisable to display a specific effect (an effect that serves as a guide for the change in the base value) at the time or descent.

The specific effect may be displayed at a timing in which the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined time. This is because if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the end of the special symbol variation display game, the player's feeling of tension is maintained and fatigue is accumulated. When the game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening while the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because a big hit lottery is held and a special symbol variation display game is started when a prize is won in the start winning opening, so it is better to have the player pay close attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold value Th1) or the number of out balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold value Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but it may be executed without fail if the same conditions are satisfied.

Further, the specific effect may not be displayed when the base value rises, but may be displayed only when the base value falls. This is because when the player is notified of the increase in the base value, the player's expectation rises, and if the base value does not rise to the extent expected by the player, the player may be discouraged due to the gap with the expectation. be. On the other hand, when the player is notified of the decrease in the base value, some players increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

Further, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing, steady state), but the display is divided into three states of the base value decreasing, steady state, and increasing. A selection table may be defined to notify the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is advisable to determine whether the base value is steady (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

Further, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, there is a higher possibility that the base value will decrease when it is displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when it is displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, when the game ball does not win the starting winning opening and the special symbol variation display game is not played, the base value usually decreases. Further, if the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined time, a demo screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69A is a display example of the normal reach, in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69B is a display example of the special reach 1, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed in the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing rock-paper-scissors, and the middle design is determined by the result of rock-paper-scissors. FIG. 69C is a display example of the special reach 2, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the battle.

FIG. 69 (D) is a display example of the freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower right of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Make a recognizable display. FIG. 69 (E) is a display example of the freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower part of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Display the continuation recognizable. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping with the decorative pattern. For example, a display that pops up in the center of the display screen may be used.

Although the example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may be changed. Further, the change in the base value may be displayed numerically instead of the tendency of the base value to move up and down.

The change in the displayed base value is the total cumulative total of the base values calculated before the specified time, even in the comparison result between the base value calculated in the time interval before the specified time and the base value calculated in the current time interval. It may be the result of comparison with the total cumulative total of the latest base values.

[9-8. Calculation of the base considering a specific general winning opening]
Next, a process of accurately calculating the base value in consideration of winning a specific general winning opening will be described.

In the pachinko machine, the player aims to win a prize in a specific winning opening (for example, the open winning opening 2005, 2006) in which the game ball is easily won during the big hit. Adjust the firing strength. Even during a big hit, you can shoot a game ball at the same place as the so-called normal hit to aim for the big prize opening 2005, or you can increase the strength of the launch to the maximum, aiming for the big prize opening 2006 by so-called right hit. There are variations. In the midst of such variations, a game board may be designed so that a start winning opening or a general winning opening is placed downstream of the large winning opening to pick up a ball spilled from the large winning opening.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of the pachinko machine that hits right during a big hit will be described in detail. During the big hit, the player hits right in order to win the game ball at the open big prize opening. Most of the game balls launched toward the game area win the big prize opening 2006 that is open. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the general winning opening 2001 is provided on the right side of the large winning opening 2005, and the right-handed gaming ball is open. If you do not win the big prize opening 2006, you will win the general winning opening 2001. That is, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the large winning opening 2005 wins only when the right-handed game ball does not win the open large winning opening 2006.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting prize opening and the general winning opening when 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a (that is, for 100 out balls). In order to show the percentage of the number of prize balls paid out), it is unlikely that a game ball that has flowed into the game area but will win a prize at the starting opening and the general winning opening (there is a high possibility of winning a big winning opening). When counted as a number (number of out balls), it is expected that the actual base value will deviate when calculated as the base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the large winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning opening is as follows.
-Fig. 70 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 71 and Fig. 72: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the above and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 70 to 72.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the number of prize balls and the out are calculated in order to calculate the base value using the number of out balls corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening for each timer interrupt cycle. Obtain the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls to a specific general winning opening (specific winning ball number) is acquired (step S820). Then, a value obtained by subtracting the specific winning ball number from the out ball number is added to the total out ball number (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-mentioned base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and a prize is awarded. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer and the number of out balls is recorded in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. Record the number in the out ball count buffer. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether or not the winning opening related to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning opening, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific number of winning balls recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 72, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). It should be noted that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). ). The total of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated out-ball number is the threshold value Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific winning ball number is subtracted from the total out-ball number and the threshold Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value is maintained at the same value, and if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, then. The base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both are updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the base value is calculated excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting opening and the general winning opening, the deviation from the actual base value may occur. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

Further, a case has been described in which a pachinko machine that hits right during a big hit has a general winning opening 2001 downstream of the big winning opening 2006, but the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning opening 2005 by a normal hit during a big hit. The pachinko machine can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a starting port or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the large winning opening 2005.

Further, in the game area 5a, large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are arranged, which normally do not accept game balls but can accept game balls according to the result of the big hit lottery. The prize balls from winning the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball wins in the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, the special symbol variation display game starts, and the big winning opening is from the time when the special symbol is confirmed until the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (big hit opening). The detected out-balls are excluded from the number of out-balls during the period from the closing of the mouths 2005 and 2006 to the start of the next special symbol variation display game (big hit ending). By doing so, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls during the special prize can be counted without determining whether or not the special prize is being awarded in step S810 as shown in FIG. 39. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time from the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. That is, during the special prize, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction. Further, in the start winning openings 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric support. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric support, a ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 2004 is detected as an out ball for a predetermined time after opening and closing of the starting winning opening 2004 (for example, a ball that has won the starting winning opening). You may include the period up to (a few seconds required) in the special prize.

Further, in the game area 5a, a second starting port 2004 is arranged, which normally does not accept the game ball but can accept the game ball according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. The prize ball due to winning the second starting port 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol variation display game starts, and from the time when the normal symbol is confirmed until it is released (opening), the second starting port 2004 The detected out-balls are excluded from the number of out-balls during the period from the closing of the game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending). When the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time between the closing of the second starting port 2004 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. By doing so, it is possible to exclude all the winnings to the second starting port 2004 from the calculation of the base value, not only during the time saving.

By doing so, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize (big hit, shortened time, etc.) without determining whether or not the special prize is being awarded in step S810 of FIG. 39 or the like.

By doing so, the number of out balls and the number of prize balls while the player is hitting right can be accurately excluded, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

Further, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game by left-handed in a state where neither the big hit nor the time is shortened (so-called normal state), and to play the game by right-handed during the big hit or the time is shortened. In such a gaming machine, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a general winning opening 2001, and a second starting opening 2004, which win a prize when hitting to the right, are provided. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning openings in the left side to the center of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting left) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) The rate of winning balls to each winning opening differs depending on the placement and the placement position of the nails. In other words, the base value when hitting left and the base value when hitting right are different.

The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player strikes left in the normal state. However, for the reason mentioned above, when the base value is different between left-handed and right-handed (for example, when the base value when right-handed in the normal state is designed to be lower than when left-handed). , When the player hits right under normal conditions, a low base value is calculated.

Hall considers that a pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or judges that it is a gaming machine with poor ball ejection performance. Even in a pachinko machine that is judged to have poor ball ejection performance (lower than the expected base), the hole determines that the player is hitting left, so the starting winning opening that acts on the base when hitting left. And make adjustments to increase the winning rate of general winning openings. Then, adjust the abnormal nail to increase the base value. If you hit the left with a gaming machine adjusted in this way, you can get a lot of prize balls even in the normal state. In other words, you can get a lot of lottery for a small amount. In other words, even if the base when hitting left is not different from what the hole expected, the hole misunderstands and makes adjustments to increase the winning rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening that win when hitting left. Since the hole may suffer a disadvantage due to such malicious intent of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value when hitting left and the base value when hitting right.

By the way, in the pachinko machine that hits right during a short time, the second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the game state and the gate portion 2003 for performing a normal symbol lottery for opening the second starting port 2004 are at the time of right hitting. It is located in the area where the game ball rolls. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 by hitting right in the normal state, the probability of winning the normal symbol is extremely low even if the lottery of the normal symbol is performed so that the second starting port 2004 does not open, or it is normal. Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened, which makes it difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value in the right-handed state in the normal state, the ball entry rate to the second starting port 2004 is increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the ball entry rate to the second starting port 2004 puts pressure on the profit of the hall. Therefore, when counting the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state and calculating the base value, it is preferable to calculate the base value corrected by using the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls driven toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. By reducing the number of out balls, a high base calculation value can be obtained. For example, if a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003, an extremely high base value will be calculated. The degree of correction processing may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (for example, when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 without winning a prize at the starting port). The number of out balls counted at a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after passing through (or before and after) the gate portion 2003 may not be used in the calculation of the base value. By doing this, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, a display such as "Please return to left-handed" or a voice may be output without actively notifying the player that the base value is not reflected in the calculation result. Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hall may be notified that the ball is hit right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or the external terminal board 784 may output that the hall computer installed in the amusement park is hitting right.

As described above, by excluding the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) from the number of out balls, the player hits right in the normal state. The base value of time can be corrected to a large value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the calculated value of the base depending on the player's game style.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value for confirming the operating status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be maintained for a long period of time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. Therefore, the base calculation / display data 13136 is erased under a condition different from the condition for erasing the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, it is possible to retain accurate prize ball number data and calculate an accurate bonus ratio.

Specifically, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation), but the backup power supply supplied to the main control MPU 1311 is cut off, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is used. By the second operation of shutting off, all the data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. In the second operation, one switch for realizing this operation may be provided, or the employee of the amusement shop disconnects the connector of the power line for backup supplied to the main control board 1310, and the pachinko machine 1 The power supply may be cut off.

In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. In the first operation, only the data related to the progress of the game is erased, but in the second operation, the calculated base value is used. And delete all data including data related to the progress of the game.

With this configuration, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation by a staff member of the game hall, so that the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved and it is possible to prevent concealment of a state in which the accessory ratio is high. ..

[9-10. Calculation of the base considering the winning abnormality]
73 and 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, an abnormality in winning may be detected. For example, when a prize is detected other than when the jackpot is derived in the special symbol variation display game 2005 and 2006, or when a win is derived in the normal symbol variation display game, the start winning slot is started. If a prize is detected other than during the opening of 2004, the prize is abnormal. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly a case where a large number of prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, the winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a case where a winning is not possible or a large number of winnings are detected in a predetermined time.

Since the winning ball related to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and calculate the base accurately. Therefore, in the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

Normally, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting winning opening 2004 are won only during the special prize, so the winning balls to these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base. There is no need to consider winning abnormalities.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73 is the prize ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value each time for each timer interrupt cycle, similarly to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39. The total number of prize balls is directly updated using the number of prize balls calculated in (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822). In FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded.

If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 sends a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a report of the completion of payout from the payout control board 951. This variation has already been described with reference to FIGS. 41-44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls won the starting prize openings 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit, and even if the winning to the starting winning opening is not suspended, the prize balls are paid out, so the total number of prize balls is updated. To. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning is not generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is large. Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning abnormality is detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning prize determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as described above, when a prize is detected in the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 other than during the special prize (when the condition device is operating) caused by the derivation of the big hit in the special symbol fluctuation display game. , If a prize is detected in the start winning opening 2004 even though it is not open due to the winning being derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that the winning is abnormal.

If one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, it may be determined to be a winning abnormality, or if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected, it may be determined to be a winning abnormality. Further, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, it may be determined to be a winning abnormality, and if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined to be a winning abnormality. You may.

Then, the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like, and the detection signals of these sensors are read and acquired by the switch input process in step S74. At this time, a value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls due to abnormal winning from the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, or the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls before winning a prize. The number of winning balls that are abnormally applied may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted from the main control board 1310, or a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 from the payout control unit 952. May be sent.

Further, even if information on both the winning and the out-balls to the winning opening is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the number of winning balls becomes the total number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Add and add the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (or the out ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). Further, even if information on winning a prize to a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of prize balls due to the plurality of winnings is the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 5 prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 3 winning balls, a total of 8 prize balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or, add to the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the launch of the game ball is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is operating (furthermore, the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the hand or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is the total prize ball number ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or fraudulent act of detecting the prize ball when the game ball is not fired, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate display of the base value. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the number of out balls is recorded in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is no prize ball as a result of the determination in step S812, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). .. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning abnormality is detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out-balls are corrected by the number of all winning balls related to the winning abnormality, but the out-balls are corrected for the winning balls related to a specific type of winning abnormality, and the like. It is not necessary to correct the out ball for the winning ball that is affected by the specific type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball related to the winning abnormality, the winning ball for the winning ball may or may not be paid out. Whether or not to pay out the prize ball for this winning abnormality should be determined for each winning opening. In this case, for a winning abnormality in which the winning ball is not paid out, the winning ball should not be counted as a total out ball and should not be used in the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, for prize-winning abnormalities in which prize balls are paid out, the prize-winning balls may be counted as total out-balls, and the prize-winning balls to be paid out may also be counted as the total number of prize-balls and used in the calculation of the base value. Even if the prize balls are paid out abnormally, the prize balls are not counted as the total out balls, and the prize balls to be paid out are not counted as the total number of prize balls, and may not be used in the calculation of the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance of a game machine failure (clearing a ball jam, etc.), a hall employee may manually insert a game ball into the starting prize opening to compensate for the ball to be ejected so that the player does not lose it. In this case, a prize ball will be paid out for the prize in the starting prize opening. The prize in the starting prize opening is detected as a prize abnormality, but the prize ball is paid out. When the prize ball is paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it is better not to judge that the prize is abnormal. In this case, the prize balls are paid out at the winning openings (starting winning openings 2002, 2004) that are reflected in the calculation of the base value, the winning abnormality is not determined, and the winning balls are used at the other winning openings (large winning openings 2005, 2006). It is advisable to judge the winning abnormality without paying out. The number of prize balls to be paid out by winning is smaller in the winning openings for determining the winning abnormality than in the winning openings for which the winning abnormality is not determined (the starting winning opening is 3 prize balls, and the large winning opening is 15 prize balls). .. For this reason, although the winning abnormality is determined at the large winning opening, even if the abnormal winning is not determined at the starting winning opening, it does not become a big security hole from the viewpoint of defense against fraudulent acts. In this way, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the out-ball and the number of winning balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls by using the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality that does not generate a winning ball, the number of winning balls and the out ball that causes the winning ball can be matched.

As described above, the winning abnormality can be determined by various winning openings, but a specific implementation example to the pachinko machine will be described.

First, the general winning opening 2001 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the general winning opening 2001 (large winning openings 2005, 2006, starting winning openings 2002, 2004) may determine the winning abnormality. Since it is difficult to win multiple gaming balls at the same time, the general winning openings are the large winning openings 2005, 2006 and the starting winning openings 2002, which are electric accessories that open and close while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent activities. The player can be compensated for the ball by entering the general winning openings 2001 (4 in total), which are provided more than (3 in total). Further, since the general winning opening 2001 can be easily identified by the employees of the hall, it is easy to operate the pachinko machine 1 for maintenance and ball ejection compensation. The reason why hall employees can easily identify the general winning opening 2001 is that the general winning opening 2001 is often arranged together (in separate areas) in the game area, and the electric accessory (large winning opening). This is because the decorative member (appearance) is different from that of 2005, 2006, starting winning openings 2002, 2004). Further, when the number of prize balls for one ball of the general prize opening is small, there is an effect that the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts is improved. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another general winning opening.

In addition, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 with a large number of prize balls do not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 (general winning openings 2001 with a small number of winning balls, starting winning openings 2002 and 2004) are used. It may be determined that the prize is abnormal. Since the number of prize balls for one prize is large in the large prize opening, the base value changes greatly even with a small number of prize balls. Therefore, it is convenient to easily inspect the change in the base value when inspecting the pachinko machine. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 where it is easy to obtain a game ball), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another large winning opening (for example, 2006). ..

Further, the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004 (general winning openings 2001, large winning openings 2005 and 2006) may determine the winning abnormality. Since the number of prize balls for one ball is smaller than that for the large prize opening, the starting winning opening can compensate the player for the ball while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine to the goto. It should be noted that the winning abnormality is not determined only by the specific starting winning opening (for example, the starting winning opening 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to understand the position), and the winning abnormality is determined by the other starting winning openings 2004. May be good.

Furthermore, in the large winning opening and the starting winning opening, the opening / closing member of the winning opening is in a position where it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine. If the opening / closing member of the winning opening is not visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening / closing member of the hall is difficult to operate, the winning abnormality may be determined. For example, a hall employee can easily operate a winning opening (so-called electric tulip) having a structure in which an opening / closing member tilts at an oblique position in a closed state and the opening / closing member picks up a game ball. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning opening is blocked by a flat plate-shaped member, and when the flat plate-shaped member retracts to the back, the entrance to the winning opening is opened. Is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only for the winning openings used to compensate the player for the ball, so that it is easy for the employees of the hall to understand and the security resistance of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method of notifying the winning abnormality may be the same as the method of notifying the winning ball number abnormality (for example, output of a security signal to an external terminal board, warning display on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a game board or a frame). The lighting and blinking of the decorative lamp, the output of voice and sound effects, the output of warning sounds, etc.), but the notification of winning abnormalities should be slower than the notification of other abnormalities. Specifically, the time for anomaly notification is short, the characters for notifying an abnormality are small, the lamp does not light during anomaly notification, and the abnormality notification sound is smaller (suppressed) than the volume of the notification sound for other abnormalities. ).

Further, in the notification of the winning abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the winning abnormality is detected, and even if the winning abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the setting is first set without extending the predetermined time. It is advisable to end the notification at a predetermined time or change the mode of notification. In this way, when the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is maintaining the gaming machine, not the cheating by the player. Therefore, if the winning abnormality is notified only for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued after that, the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall is not disturbed and the work efficiency can be improved. Further, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined time, it can be seen that the maintenance work of the gaming machine is not disturbed and the work is being performed correctly and continuously. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the notification by sound (or reduce the volume) while the notification by the display device or the lamp is continued.

In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correction means divides a plurality of winning openings into a plurality of types (starting winning opening, large winning opening). For the first type of winning openings, the number of out balls is corrected based on the winning balls detected other than when the predetermined conditions are satisfied (during the special prize), and for the second type of winning openings, the predetermined number is specified. The number of out balls is not corrected based on the winning balls detected except when the condition of (during special prize) is satisfied. As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent a deviation in the number of out balls when compensating the player due to maintenance of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately calculate the number of out balls. In addition, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as an adjustment (maintenance) thereof. This allows an accurate base value to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, the detection of winning abnormalities and the exceptional handling of detection of winning abnormalities (when not detected) have been described, but the game balls judged to be winning abnormalities are not the prize balls acquired in the game, but the pachinko machine. Since there is a high possibility that it will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning balls for which a winning abnormality is determined are not reflected in the number of out balls and should not be used for calculating the base value.

Further, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the fraud detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, the winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The notification of the winning abnormality may be performed when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. Further, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, the winning abnormality may be notified, or if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, the winning abnormality may be notified. Notification may be performed.

Further, the notification of the winning abnormality may be terminated after a lapse of a predetermined time, or may be terminated when the winning opening is opened (the condition device is activated).

It is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation process that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the calculation circuit 13121 performs the division process for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processes than the CPU 13111 executing the division by the program. The base calculation process described so far did not take advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in relation to the calculation of the base value, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) described above, in the switch input process (step S74), the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to obtain the number of out balls. Is counted, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S98), the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

After that, in the base calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Since the timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined time intervals, the predetermined process must be completed for each timer interrupt. Therefore, in the slow division process by the program, the time-consuming process is included in the timer interrupt process. That is, it was difficult to include multiple base calculation processes in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated a plurality of times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

Further, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the divisor and the divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the division and the divisor and the output timing of the quotient are different, the degree of freedom of the base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing utilizing the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. Since the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98), the description of the same process will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is read by reading the detection signal from the sensor that detects the winning ball, the detection signal from the switch that detects fraudulent activity, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the launch ball sensor 1020. To count.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 1 (step S97). In the base calculation process 1, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step S76) and the random number update process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 2 (step S98). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9709).

After that, in the same manner as in step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base (base value or abnormality of the base value) is notified to the player or the hall employee. The base notification command is a display command to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244) controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 or the speaker 921. And sound output commands. Further, when the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 is used for notification, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs and LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED element. It is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, the drive signal including the character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. When the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the gaming state is in the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of prize balls cannot be acquired or the number of acquired prize balls is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but it is not necessary to calculate the base value. Further, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each timer interrupt process for a predetermined time (for example, one minute having a longer cycle than the timer interrupt process). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced as compared with the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97, S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of prize balls.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the out-ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball number storage area (specifically, the out-ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the total out ball number buffer value is updated so as to add the out ball number buffer value to the total out ball number (step S9705), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9709).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there is no prize ball, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls corresponds to, for example, a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the starting prize opening) at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. For example, when a prize ball) has been obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S9807), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1 may be compared, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

After that, it is determined whether the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality activated in step S9807 has timed up (step S9815). Then, when the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is timed up, the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of fired balls. You may. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIGS. 23 and 75) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S93 and S94) and the base display process (step S95). Is omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 84.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step S76) and the random number update process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 85.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 reads from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and executes a base display process for generating a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 76.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 3 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 77.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of prize balls cannot be acquired or the number of acquired prize balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. 82, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is the division input register A131216. The total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display process shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97, S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 85. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of prize balls.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 78.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the out-ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball number storage area (specifically, the out-ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the total out ball number buffer value is updated so as to add the out ball number buffer value to the total out ball number (step S9705), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 79.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there is no prize ball, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls means that, for example, a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the starting prize opening) are obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. For example, if it is. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S9807), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1 may be compared, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. 85, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is the division input register A131216. The total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 of the base calculation process 4 has timed up (step S8903). Then, when the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is timed up, the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of launched balls. May be good. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and the next timer interrupt processing starts), the arithmetic circuit The input value (divided, divided) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is written at the timing when the division result can be read from 13121. Specifically, the writing timing of the input value (division, division) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is the first half of the timer interrupt processing, before the random number update processing (step S78), or a special symbol or a normal symbol. It is better before the control process (steps S86, S88).

Further, it may be determined whether or not the process of calculating the base value is executed depending on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening, it may be switched whether to use the number of prize balls or the number of out balls in the calculation of the base value. For example, the prize ball of the winning opening that gives the maximum prize ball to one winning ball does not have to be used in the calculation of the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one prize ball) to be given when the game medium specified for each prize opening provided in the game area wins is one, three. In the case of three types of five and five, the maximum number of five prize balls and the corresponding number of out balls need not be used in the calculation of the base value. This is because when a prize with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value becomes large, and the lower digits of the calculated base value are rounded by the processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). Even if it is displayed, the displayed value may change frequently. In such a case, it becomes difficult to judge by the hole whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether it is according to the set ball ejection rate).

Further, it is not necessary to use the minimum number of prize balls and the corresponding number of out balls in the calculation of the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to a prize with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the one prize ball is not used for calculating the base value, the lower digit of the base value calculated by the processing means is rounded. If it is displayed (rounded, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), the displayed base value may not change, so processing that does not contribute to the change in the display may be omitted.

Further, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the case where the number of prize balls is the minimum is described, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls of the intermediate value between the maximum and the minimum in the calculation of the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum number of prize balls are used in the calculation of the base value, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine are shown by averaging the maximum and minimum, which is appropriate. The base value can be shown.

Although the pattern of the number of prize balls of three types has been described, the pattern of the number of prize balls of other types such as five types and seven types is not limited to the three types.

Furthermore, if the winning of the number of prize balls of a specific type (1 of the above-mentioned minimum value, 3 of the intermediate value, 5 of the maximum value, etc.) is not used in the calculation of the base value, the winning will be awarded. All winnings in the gaming state when detected need not be used to calculate the base value. For example, if the winning to the winning opening that grants five prize balls is not used in the calculation of the base value, in the gaming state in which the winning to the winning opening is detected, the winning is until the end of the gaming state. Do not use mouths or other winning mouths to calculate the base value. In addition, even after the start of the game state, the winning openings and other winning openings are not used for the calculation of the base value retroactively.

In addition, the winning when the gaming state when the winning is detected does not have to be used for the calculation of the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected transitions to another gaming state. It is not necessary to use the winning prizes up to to calculate the base value. This is because the pachinko machine is normal (for example, is it according to the set ball ejection rate) by not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the game state where the calculated base value changes greatly in the calculation of the base value? This is to eliminate the possibility of delaying the judgment of.

It should be noted that the prize balls that are the maximum (or the minimum, the middle) for one prize ball when the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state do not have to be used in the calculation of the base value.

Next, a specific process will be described in which the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are not used in the calculation of the base value depending on the number of game media (prize balls) described above.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, it may be determined whether the main control MPU 1311 uses the winning in the calculation of the base value. .. Then, for the prizes that are determined not to be used for the calculation of the base value, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls for calculating the base value may not be updated, or the calculation process of the base value may not be executed. do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base is calculated. In process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Further, when all the detected prizes are not used for the calculation of the base value, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process 1 (step S97) and the base calculation process 2 (step S98) in FIG.

Further, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In, the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Further, when all the detected prizes are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the base calculation process 4 (step S94), and the base display process (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. You may.

As a method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls, the same method as the correction of out balls due to abnormal winning described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted.

In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning balls whether the detected winning prize is used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation processing 1 (step S97), the base calculation processing 2 (step S98), and the base calculation processing 3 ( In step S93) and base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether the prize is being awarded.

In this way, by excluding the number of out balls and the number of winning balls required for a predetermined prize from the calculation of the base value, the process is executed without skipping, so that it is easy to check whether the process is executed accurately, especially in the development stage. Can be confirmed. Further, by not updating the base value without executing the process of calculating the base value, the process of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (lottery process, process of determining the fluctuation pattern, etc.) are accurately executed. can.

That is, even if the maximum prize is given to the player among multiple prizes having different degrees of advantage, it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the base value is displayed unchanged by the grant of the prize. The prize. Further, the calculated base value is displayed unchanged at least until the game state in which the maximum prize is given is completed.

[9-12. Another configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17, a board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is provided on the game board 5 as a discharge ball sensor 3060, and a frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is a main body frame. It is provided in 4. Either one of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

As described above, the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 that detects a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. 92. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the start port sensors 2104 and 2551, and the number of game balls detected by various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. The total with the number is taken as the number of out balls.

As described above, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball discharged from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

When both the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are provided, the count results of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the count results of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are compared, and two count results are obtained. An error may be notified when a difference of a predetermined value or more occurs. Further, when a difference of a predetermined time or more occurs between the two counting results within a predetermined time, an error may be notified.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an indispensable configuration, and the display contents (provisional section display and fixed section display) of the base display 1317 can be switched at predetermined time intervals as described later (provisional section display and fixed section display). (See FIG. 99), the base value may be displayed or the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

The configuration other than the above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

88 and 89 are views showing the arrangement of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls are arranged in a single row in a ball flow path 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board, and the out balls are counted by one frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B. .. The game ball that rolls in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board 5 via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the large winning opening 2005, and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 in which the discharged game balls flow down to the right side of the front view and are aligned in one row. The frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls arranged in one row.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls aligned in a ball flow path 960 provided on the back surface of a game board are flowed down by two rows and counted by a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. The game ball that rolls in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the starting winning opening 2002, 2004, and the large winning opening 2005, 2006. .. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 in which the discharged game balls flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and are aligned in two rows. Each of the two frame-side ejection ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls arranged in each row.

Although the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the positions shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, it may be unitized together with the ball flow path 960 and configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of connection between the discharge ball sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected to the connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the output signal of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected to the connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the panel side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected is the main control board 1310. It should be provided on the lower side.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are connected are provided separately. The output line of the 3060A and the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

The output line of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. You may.

Further, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and in particular, shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of a sensor that detects winning in various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (position of a star in the figure). It is provided in. The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5, and is partially overlapped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111. This is to prevent incorrect base value calculation. That is, when the player operates the discharge ball sensor 3060 by bringing the magnet close to the out port 1111, the number of out balls is counted more than the actual number, and the base value is lowered. Therefore, the gaming store may perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1 so as to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine whose maintenance work is performed based on a base value different from the actual one, the number of balls released in the normal state increases, and the player can play in a more advantageous state than usual, and can obtain many balls. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent such illegal payout of balls. It is preferable to provide a magnetic detection sensor 1030 in a place other than the vicinity of the out port 1111 where the discharge ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 should have a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when the out-balls are detected by the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060, the magnetism is detected within a range sufficient to cover the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 may include another winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 provided in the upper part of the out opening 1111).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes an discharge ball sensor 3060 and a winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first large winning opening sensor 2114, second upper winning opening. Sensor 2554, second lower prize opening sensor 2557, etc.), receives the output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030, and inputs it to the main control MPU 1311.

The main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 outputs signals input from various sensors after level conversion and shaping (for example, chattering removal). The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to any of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signal level-converted or shaped by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals and buffered. It is input to any of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. As a result, the detection result by each sensor is taken into the main control MPU 1311.

The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the input of the A1 to A8 terminals, and the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 4V) or a predetermined threshold (for example, power supply voltage-). When the level becomes higher than 0.1V), the disconnection of the connection line to the switch or the short circuit of the switch is detected, and when the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold value, the abnormal signal E Is output, and a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals regardless of the input signals of the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and when the power supply voltage becomes a level lower than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 12V-20%) and an abnormality in the power supply is detected, an abnormality signal E is output. At the same time, a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals regardless of the input signals of the A1 to A8 terminals. That is, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit for the input is OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the output of the sensor is invalid). As a result, the main control MPU 1311 does not need to determine whether or not to execute the processing of the input signal depending on whether or not the power supply of the switch is turned off, the processing load can be reduced, and the output signals of Y1 to Y8 can be output. Regardless of the state of the input signals A1 to 8, each sensor can output a signal at a level of OFF.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, it does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). A signal from a sensor used to calculate the base value (number of ejected balls, number of prize balls) and a signal from a sensor not used to calculate the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.) are input to the interface circuit 1331. .. The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the base calculation, the base calculation is not executed and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for calculating the base value, and when any of the signals becomes abnormal, Output an abnormal signal to stop the base calculation.

93, 94, and 95 are diagrams showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. FIG. 93 (A) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93 (B) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to each other. An example of being connected to the driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. 95 (A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, FIG. 95 (B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95 (C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 93 (B), the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in FIG. 93 (A), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Then, the display data is output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and incorporated into one latch circuit 1333. Then, the display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 93 (B), a reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line from which the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 does not intersect with the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal.

The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected, and may be provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310. Not only the output line from the panel side discharge ball sensor 3060A but also the output lines from other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104 and the like and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are connected to the connector 13101. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected, and may be provided under the main control board 1310. The signal from the discharge ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back surface side. The solid line is the pattern on the back surface side, the broken line is the pattern on the component surface side, and the dotted line is the component mounted on the component surface of the printed circuit board. Is shown. The illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333), and the segment on the cathode side of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 2 (1334). Connected to the terminal.

Further, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 is input to the latch 1 (1333), and each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 1 (1334). It is connected to the common terminal on the anode side of.

A chip select signal for controlling the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) is the timing at which the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, the data for controlling the blinking of each segment is taken in from the data lines (D1 to D8). Further, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

A reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. Further, the reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333, and the latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

This is because in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, a pulse signal is transmitted in the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 and the main control MPU 1311. The level changes frequently on the data line to and from the base indicator 1317. In particular, a large current required to drive the LED element flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (particularly between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) causes noise. Then, when the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 intersects with the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, noise is placed on the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, and the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions. there's a possibility that. The intersection of the signal lines can also occur at the intersection of the wiring patterns on the front surface and the back surface of the printed circuit board, or the intersection of the wiring patterns of the inner layer and the front surface layer (front surface, back surface).

Specifically, by inputting a reset signal to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that cannot occur originally, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, and the game may be stopped or the game state may be erased. .. If the game state is erased at a timing that cannot occur originally, the normal power failure process is not executed and the game is reset, so that the data stored in the RAM 1312 is cleared, the jackpot ends, or the variable display game is played. It ends in the middle, or the hold of the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game is deleted.

The main control board box 1320 is partially low in height and high in other parts depending on the height of the parts attached to the main control board 1310 and the interference with other members when assembled. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, since the main control MPU 1311 has a high height, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high at the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of the main control board box 1320, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and parts such as a relatively tall electrolytic capacitor are mounted. On the other hand, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low in the area on the right side of the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and parts such as a short IC are mounted (tall parts cannot be arranged). The height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and the area where a high-height component can be mounted is shown by hatching. Further, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height equal to or less than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted (preferably the same height as the board surface), and the like. It is advisable not to hinder the insertion and removal of the cable (connector) connected to the board of.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 according to the height of the parts mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the goto behavior of attaching illegal parts (circuits) on the main control board. can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged in the upper right part of the main control board 1310, but even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for the convenience of maintenance, the display content is based at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents. The display 1317 may be arranged. For example, if the player can visually recognize the display content of the base display 1317 when the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during business (confirming the presence or absence of a game ball in the replenishment tank), the player In many cases, the player does not correctly understand how to read the display of the base display 1317. Therefore, the player may be asked to explain the display contents of the base display 1317, in order to prevent such complications. In addition, it is preferable to arrange the base display 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents. Further, by arranging the base display 1317 in this way, it is possible to suppress inquiries from the player. That is, the base display 1317 displays the base value for the operation of 52,000 out balls at the maximum, but since it is different from the base value in the short-time game by the player, a complaint about the ball ejection rate may occur. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this way, complaints from the player can be suppressed. The above is the same for the above-mentioned accessory ratio display 1317, and it is preferable to arrange the accessory ratio display 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents.

As shown in the figure, since the base display (7-segment LED) 1317 has a low height, it is mounted in a region where the height of the main control board box 1320 is low.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93 (A), an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are composed of a light emitting diode (LED) will be described, but the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 may be composed of a lamp (bulb) or another light emitting element. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 captures the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs the data. The driver circuit 1334 operates a switching transistor according to the input signal, and outputs a power supply voltage (+ 12V) input to the VCS terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 takes in the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs the bus data from the Q1 to Q8 terminals to the driver circuit 1334, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistor according to the signal input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltage of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LEDs constituting the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LEDs of the function display unit 1400.

For example, in order to light the 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the first digit of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) inputs the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of the CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured in the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the first-digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317 is displayed. Driven.

Further, in order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 taken in by the latch 3 (1333) are used by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of the CS2, and the segment data (when lit is LOW). ) Is output. Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured in the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 is an anode common type, a current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 in the 7-segment LED. Therefore, the outputs of the drivers 1 and 4 when the segment is lit are VCS (+ 12V), and the outputs of the drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus to the Q1 to Q8 terminals as they are, but the latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and the data bus. A signal may be output from any of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary data obtained from.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 96, the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Further, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt processing. That is, since both the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 by different signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 can be displayed. It is output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and segment data for controlling the lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

The display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are generated by another process in the timer interrupt process, and are output at different timings in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the base display 1317 by executing the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the function display unit 1400 by executing the game control code 13131 in the game control area. These data will be generated by another program (code) and output at different timings.

Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 may be executed at a timing different from the timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be subsequently executed.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to the programs (game control code 13131, base calculation / display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but they are the same. It is advisable to use control data common to the two codes so that the common signal is not transmitted at the timing, and to control so that the transmission timing of the common signal does not overlap. For example, a common counter that is commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 is provided. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400 and the common counter is used. Is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317 when is 4 to 7.

The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be separated or configured by one subroutine. The game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the base calculation / display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 are each. It is advisable to call the subroutine at the timing specified by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 or the base display 1317. In this case, the output of the data sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of the data sent to the base display 1317 are not performed in the same timer interrupt process. Although the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 are executed within one timer interrupt process, the subroutine is called by a different timer interrupt process.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, the display unit (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310 is connected. Even if noise is mixed in, the influence on the internal display (base display 1317) of the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93 (B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. It is a circuit diagram of an example. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I / O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, the difference from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 96, but the common signal of the function display unit 1400 is the same as that of the base display 1317. It is common.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 3 (1333) is used as segment data (when lit is LOW) by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured in the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, the circuit scale can be reduced by sharing the driver circuit between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate can be reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily miniaturized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed circuit board having three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board having a pattern only on the front surface and the back surface. Therefore, even if the components can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 composed of the two-layer board, the area around which the wiring pattern is routed cannot be secured, and the board must be larger than the three-layer or more multi-layer board. Therefore, it is important to reduce the number of parts to reduce the size.

FIG. 98 is a timing diagram of the configuration example of the main control I / O port 1314 shown in FIG. 97. In FIG. 98, the dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates the timer interrupt processing delimiter (timer interrupt processing start timing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) receives common data corresponding to the digits specified by D1 to D4 (during drive). Outputs HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit by the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. The latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and the driver 3 (1334) fetches the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. It outputs and lights the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit by the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting the CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) fetches the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. Output and turn on the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all the data in the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1 and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-mentioned process, and outputs the digit selection data and the display data. In this way, the common driver circuit is shared between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the segment data is time-divisioned and output, and the common common data is used to function with the base display 1317. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be turned on.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (B) and 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced and high-density mounting (for example). , It is possible to easily mount the components on the main control board 1310, which cannot be used (adopting a multilayer board or arranging components in close proximity to each other).

Further, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display are output during the period when the common data is output. The segment data is output at a timing different from that of 1317. Therefore, while controlling both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by a common common data line, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be displayed and controlled within one timer interrupt process. ..

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of the chip select (CS2, CS1) and is erased at the rising timing of the chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erased data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, if the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display unit 1317. Become longer. This prolongs the lighting time of the LED of the function display unit 1400 arranged on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 in one cycle and raises the brightness, thereby reducing the visibility due to being directly illuminated by the lighting of the hall. This is to prevent it. Further, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, even if the LED emits light with low brightness, the influence on the visibility of the base display 1317 is small. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission luminance of the first LED is higher than the emission luminance of the second LED.

Contrary to the above, the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display time of the base display unit 1317 is displayed by the function display unit 1400. It may be longer than the time.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in the state (interval) involved in the calculation of the base value.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the provisional section display and the confirmed section display are switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) intervals. In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, "bA." Is displayed in the first two digits to indicate that the base value A is displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the last two digits as a two-digit percentage. If the integer portion of the percentage of the base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, if it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and if it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that the base value A can be understood as 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the provisional section display, if the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is less than the predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits (or all four digits) are blinked and the accurate base value can be measured. Indicates that it is not. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is a predetermined number (for example, 6000) or more, the first two digits are lit and displayed to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

In the fixed section display, the base value of the previous section is displayed. Specifically, "bb." Is lit up in the first two digits to indicate that the base value B is displayed, and the base value in the previous section is displayed in the last two digits (below the previous period). The base value B), which is the final value of two digits, is lit and displayed as a percentage of two digits. If the integer portion of the percentage of the base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, if it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and if it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that the base value B can be understood as 0% or 100%.

In the first section, since the previous section is a test section, the base value is not measured. Therefore, in the fixed section display, "bb." Is blinked in the first two digits and "---" is blinked in the last two digits.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 256) in which the number of out balls is less than 500 from the first power-on is set as a test section, and the base value is not calculated. This is because, in a predetermined number of launches from the first power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the number of balls to be ejected may vary within the range of the probability distribution, the base value is not stable, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. .. Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317. Specifically, in the provisional section display, "bA." Is displayed in the first two digits, "---" is displayed in the last one digit, and "bb." Is displayed in the first two digits in the fixed section display. , "---" Is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, the entire number of digits of the base display 1317 is blinked to indicate that the accurate base value cannot be measured.

Here, the first power-on means the first power-on after the completion of 1 of the pachinko machine, or immediately after the initialization of the work area for base calculation (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108) is executed. It is a state. Further, the power-on time generally used in the present specification is a power-on time other than the first power-on time.

If an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is deleted in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out balls in all game states (big hit, normal game, time saving, non-time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.) reaches 52000, the next section Switch to and measure the base value anew. The number of out balls in one section is not 52,000, and may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the daily operating time of the pachinko machine 1 is 10 hours, 60,000 pachinko machines, which are the daily operating hours (number of out balls), may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. You may adopt 50,000 or 100,000 which are sharp numbers.

The number of out balls in one section may be changed as appropriate. For example, a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, etc.) may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out balls in one section may be set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 or another board connected to the main control board 1310. Further, if the setting of the switch is changed, the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) of RAM 1312 is initialized and the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section, or the calculation of the base value is restarted from the beginning of the current section. good. Since pachinko machines are often in operation immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the business period has passed, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting means capable of setting an operation for determining the length of a section which is a unit for calculating the base value, and is based on the operation set by the setting means at the time of the first power-on. The length of one section is set.

In this way, the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of the immediately preceding section are switched and displayed on the base display 1317 at predetermined time intervals. In addition, the display contents are displayed on a part of the base display 1317 so that the display contents can be distinguished, and the measured base value is displayed on the other part.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a plurality of digits (for example, 4 digits) of 7-segment LEDs, and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking the segments of each digit. 0 to 9 can be displayed as numbers, and letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and-signs can also be displayed. In addition, the decimal point can be displayed at the same time as the numbers and letters. The case where the number 6 is displayed at the same time as the decimal point and the case where the number 9 is displayed are shown.

FIGS. 101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 is compared with the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22, and the check code calculation process (step S50) and the check code storage process (step S52) are deleted. Therefore, the calculation of the check code in the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes an initialization process by executing a main control program. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determination (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30). , Step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff and the checksum in step S48. Compare (verify) with the stored checksum (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( (Other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased in step S24. Proceed to.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18) and the power failure flag abnormality (step S20) in which the power failure flag is not set. , There is a RAM abnormality in which the checksums of the RAMs do not match (step S22) and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack area) is used. Included) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

In the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 are different from those shown in the figure. You may clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N may be determined in this order, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is deleted under different conditions (the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128) for each data type. do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. When the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the base calculation area 13128 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the staff of the game hall, and the abnormal base value is concealed. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine modified to a state where the base value is high or low.

The main control MPU 1311 has an initial setting process (step S28) for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting or the RAM initialization process of the RAM work area is executed, and a peripheral control board. The power-on command setting process (step S32) for transmitting to 1510 is executed, and the execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure warning signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), the random number update process is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power cutoff process (power cutoff setting means). In the power-off processing, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output ports are cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46), and checks the checksum calculation result in the RAM 1312. Store in the thumb area (step S48).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is duplicated in each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time the data is updated) in the base calculation process instead of the process when the power is turned off on the main board side. In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the base and the calculated base value even when the power is turned off. Can be retained and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

The check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in the modification described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Further, a value indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56), and "01H" indicating write prohibition is output to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing of the RAM 1312 (step). S58), wait until recovery from a power failure (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of the base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26A is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is composed of a part of the RAM 1312, and is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game area) as described above.

The base calculation area 13128 includes a storage area for a base value A, a base value B, a section counter, a total number of out balls, a low probability / non-time saving out ball number, and a low probability / non-time saving prize ball number.

The storage area of the base value A is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area of the base value B is composed of 1 byte, and stores the base value measured in the section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter is composed of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section for which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated every time the section is switched, and is used to control the display content that differs depending on the section. The interval counter may be controlled so as not to be larger than any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2. Specifically, the section counter = 0 in the test section, the section counter = 1 in the first section, and the section counter = 2 in the second and subsequent sections. Further, the section counter may be controlled as a value from 0 to 255 so as not to be larger than 255, and the section counter = 2 or more after the second section.

The storage area for the total number of out balls is composed of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out balls regardless of the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total number of out balls is used to determine the switching of the interval, which is the measurement unit of the base. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with the operation of one day as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area of the total number of out balls. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting all the number of out balls regardless of the gaming state for each section, and the total number of out balls in the above-mentioned embodiment (the number of out balls in the special prize). It is different from the total value from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for the low probability / non-time saving out ball number is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of out balls for calculating the base value (the number of out balls in the game state other than during the special prize) is calculated. Store. The storage area for the low probability / non-time saving prize balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (the number of prize balls in the gaming state other than during the special prize) is calculated. Store. The storage area for the low-probability / non-time-saving out ball number and the storage area for the low-probability / non-time-saving prize ball number may be an area of 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, the number of bytes is the same. It is better to do it.

The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is only an example, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

Further, when the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 are provided, a storage area having the same configuration is provided in the RAM 1312.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

Compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. 23, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is provided with a base calculation process (step S801) instead of the accessory ratio calculation area update process in step S81, and the combination of step S89. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74), a timer update process (step S76), a random number update process 1 (step S78), and a prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103) is updated and the base value is calculated (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it may be executed in an early order in order to reliably execute each timer interrupt. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, since the base value is measured by the timer interrupt processing, the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts showing an example of the base calculation process.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first large winning opening sensor 2114, second upper winning opening sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower prize opening sensor 2557, etc.) or the discharge ball sensor (board side discharge ball sensor 3060A, frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated by the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. Judge that there is an error that cannot be done. Also, if it is determined that fraudulent activity has been performed (for example, the magnetic detection sensor has detected magnetism, the vibration detection sensor has detected vibration, or the radio wave detection sensor has detected radio waves), the base value is accurate. Judges that there is an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that there is this error, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, an error that accompanies a game stop (for example, magnetism, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not accompany the game stop (for example, a prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) is determined. A failure that is not directly related to the calculation of the door or base (out of supply, full tank error, etc.) may be determined as not an error (NO). That is, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if there is some abnormality among the plurality of types of abnormal states, and not to execute the base calculation process if there is another abnormality.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, or the like, and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, it is out. Acquire the number of balls = 1. When an out ball is detected by a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060, the total value of the numbers detected by each sensor is acquired as the number of out balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As for the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process in step S80 is acquired. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 sends a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a report of the completion of payout from the payout control board 951. This variation is as described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball is detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If the out ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8022 without executing the process related to the out ball. On the other hand, if the out spheres are detected, the detected out spheres are added to the total number of out spheres stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is less than 500 from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is 0, which is the initial value. It has become. Therefore, if the interval counter value is 0, it can be determined that the interval is a test interval. If it is a test section, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not a test section, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8019). The determination as to whether or not the prize is being awarded can be determined in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. The fact that the game state is in the special prize means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big hit, and the player can win many prize balls, but the opening and ending time of the big hit game is included. You may. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning opening and the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction.

Further, in the start winning openings 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric support. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric support, a ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 2004 is detected as an out ball for a predetermined time after opening and closing of the starting winning opening 2004 (for example, a ball that has won the starting winning opening). You may include the period up to (a few seconds required) in the special prize. The so-called "hidden game state", which is a high-probability game state but does not become during the time reduction (during electric support), is not included in the special prize, and is in the game state as in the normal state (low probability / non-time reduction state). The base value may be calculated using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, and the base value may be displayed so that it can be distinguished which base display is used.

Even if the latent game state has a high probability, it is a game state that does not make the player recognize that it is a high probability state, but if the latent game state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, the frame is opened during business. In addition, the player may look at the base display 1317 and recognize that the game is in a latent game state (that is, with a high probability). That is, when the employee of the hall cares for the ball in the winning opening or throws the ball in the out opening in the open frame state, the player can know the playing state depending on whether the base display changes. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state.

On the other hand, in the business of the hall, it may be necessary to manage the base value in a low probability / non-time saving state, and if the base value is calculated including the latent game state, it may not be possible to manage according to the business form of the hall. .. By excluding the latent game state and calculating the base value, such a problem can be avoided. The same problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state. That is, since the normal game state and the latent game state are different game states in the first place, depending on the business form of the hall, it may be desired to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each game state. ..

When calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state, even if the base value is calculated using the dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using the common calculation process. You may. By calculating the base value using a common calculation process, the processing load of the CPU can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can be divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, the special prizes related to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 in the gaming machine of this embodiment are during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending). Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and out balls other than during the special prize, the normal (so-called big hit) prizes to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are not used to calculate the base value. On the other hand, in the starting winning opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having the opening / closing member, the winning balls and the winning balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (large winning openings 2005, 2006) are calculated based on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls regardless of the playing state (whether or not the special prize is in progress). Not used, other prizes (starting winning opening 2004) switch whether to use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the calculation of the base value or not, depending on the game state (whether or not the special prize is in progress). Will be.

Further, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. Generally, small hits occur during a short time, and since it is open for a short time, it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated except during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during the time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and the winning balls to the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated other than during the special prize may be used for the calculation of the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to the standard of the base value, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the gaming state is in the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low probability / non-time saving out ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 should be used for the calculation of the base, so that the number of out balls detected in the base calculation area 13128 is detected in the low probability / non-time saving out ball number. The number of out balls is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or prize ball other than during the special prize is detected for each execution of the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), and indicates the timing for calculating the base value (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the prize ball is detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If the prize ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process related to the prize ball. On the other hand, if the prize ball is detected, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether or not the prize is being awarded may be the same as in step S8019.

If the gaming state is in the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low probability / non-time saving prize ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for the calculation of the base. The number of prize balls awarded is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). When the update flag is 1, since an out ball or a prize ball other than the special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), the low probability / non-time saving prize ball number is set to the low probability / non-time saving out ball. The base value is calculated by dividing by a number and stored in the storage area of the base value A of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether or not the test section is in progress (step S8028). Then, when the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (including the initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and indicates that the section counter is the test section. If the total number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is the timing to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if it is in the test section and it is the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8032 in order to shift from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The interval counter changes from 0 representing the test interval to 1 representing the first interval. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). By this process, the test section is terminated and the process shifts to the first section.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8028 that the interval counter value is not 0 and it is not in the test interval, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of out balls is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out balls is less than 52000, the process proceeds to step S8034 in order to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is 52000 or more, the process for ending the section and starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area and writes it in the base value B storage area in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8031). After that, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the interval counter is controlled so as not to be larger than any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2, so that even if 1 is added to the interval counter when the interval counter value is 2. The interval counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). When the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch between the provisional section display and the fixed section display described with reference to FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the fixed section display is the cycle of the blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 in FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls in each section is less than 6000. It is better to have a sufficiently long time. This is because if the blinking and display switching have the same cycle, the blinking display (that is, whether the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is less than 6000) becomes difficult to understand. This is to make it easier to understand whether it is a switch.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). As the check code calculation method, the same calculation method as the process for calculating the check code in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22) is used. If the check code is set to a fixed value without being calculated, it is preferable to set the value to a plurality of bytes in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, if the check code is 2 bytes, A55AH (1010010101011010B)). To). Further, instead of setting a fixed value in a continuous area, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it is preferable to configure it with a larger number of bytes than the check data calculated by the checksum to improve the possibility of determining the RAM abnormality.

In this way, according to the base calculation process of this embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so that the base value is set without delay at the timing of each occurrence of a prize ball or each occurrence of an out ball ( It can be displayed (in real time), and it can be judged without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal. Since the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for the base calculation, is extremely small as compared with the capacity of the game control area 13126, a check code is displayed at the end of each execution of the base calculation process. Even if it is calculated, the influence on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

In addition, when the base value of the prize balls is calculated and displayed using the planned number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing of calculation and display as the base value and the timing of the prize balls being paid out Is different. That is, a state in which the prize ball is not paid out due to an abnormality in the payout device (out of supply, the upper plate is full, a failure of the payout number count sensor provided in the prize ball passage, a failure of the payout motor, etc.) Even if it becomes a stop, etc.), the base value is calculated and displayed.

In the above-mentioned base calculation process, the base value is calculated using the number of out balls detected by the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called a plurality of times, and the base value is calculated a plurality of times. By doing so, even if the timing of switching the above-mentioned section (the number of out balls is 52,000) arrives in one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which section before and after the calculation is performed as the base value. , Can display accurate base values in real time.

Further, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display data generation process.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499. Therefore, the process of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed while the display switching counter is between 0 and 1249, and the display switching counter is between 1250 and 2499. Executes the processes of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "---" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

When it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the section is currently the test section or the first section (step S8047). Since the base value has not been measured in the past fixed section in the test section or the first section, data for displaying "---" in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest confirmed section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is smaller than 6000 (step S8050). ). If the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is smaller than 6000, the number of operations (number of out balls) after starting the measurement of the base value in the section is small, so the base value may not be stable. The display of the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is 6000 or more, the display of the base display 1317 is controlled to light without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the process proceeds to step S8055 without initializing the display switching counter. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition is completed, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and the lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) executed at predetermined time intervals, the display content on the base display 1317 is switched by using the display switching counter that is periodically updated, so that the present in the provisional section is present. The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the fixed section can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, since the blinking display is performed in the range where the base value is not stable in each section, it can be easily confirmed by the display of the base display 1317 whether the base value is in the stable range or the unstable range.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the base calculation process. In the modified example shown in FIG. 108, it is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105 except that the check process (steps S8012 and S8013) of the work for base calculation is added. Note that FIG. 108 describes up to the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation process, but the processes from steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those in FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code (step S8012). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N may be determined in this order, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012), but conversely, the base calculation area is determined. After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and executing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

Since the subsequent processes (steps S8014 to) are the same as those in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, their description will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal for each timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds), so that an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected quickly and an abnormality can be detected. It is possible to suppress the display of various base values.

Next, the abnormality determination method of the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described. The value used for the calculation of the base value and the calculated base value are the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the "feature ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is the "base calculation area 13128". It is stored in (replaced) and determines whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations in which process (timing) the normal / abnormal determination step and the check code calculation step are performed.
FIGS. 101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization process).
FIG. 106 and FIG. 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and judged when the power is turned on)
First, using FIGS. 101 and 106, a process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) at the time of turning on the power will be described.

When the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the base calculation area 13128 is set in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106). The check code (for example, checksum) is calculated from the data of.

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so that the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value is started from the test period.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N may be determined, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal first may be duplicated in the main area to recover the data in the base calculation area 13128. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

In this case, the frequency of the check code determination is low, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(A case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, using FIGS. 21 and 22, a process of determining the check code calculated when the power is turned off at the time of turning on the power (initialization process) will be described.

When the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power cutoff process of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of calculation and determination of the check code is low, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where check code is calculated by timer interrupt processing and judged)
Next, using FIGS. 106 and 108, a process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described.

Assuming that the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIG. 108 and 106).

Further, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area in steps S24 and S26 is normal may be omitted.

In this case, the abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

When a fixed value is used for the checksum instead of the checksum, the timing of setting and determining the checksum may be the same as the timing of calculating and determining the checksum. Further, both the checksum and the fixed value may be used together as the check code for the determination.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the calculation of the base value when the gaming state is switched.

One game ball won a prize while the start winning opening 2004 (electric tulip) was opened, and then the predetermined number of variable display games ended, the time saving state ended, and the normal state was restored. After that, in the normal state, it is assumed that the game ball wins a prize in the opening winning opening 2004 which is being opened.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display according to the winning of the starting winning opening 2004. That is, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in relation to any of the illustrated winnings in the starting winning opening 2004.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting winning opening 2004 is not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number. , The second winning ball is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number.

In the above, the time when the time saving state ends has been described, but the same applies to the time when the probability change by ST ends.

In addition to the above-mentioned time saving state ending, the same phenomenon occurs when a big hit of a special symbol fluctuation display game occurs. In the normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while the start winning opening 2004 (electric tulip) is open, then the big hit state starts, and the game ball wins in the opening winning opening 2004. do.

Also in this case, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in connection with the winning of any of the starting winning openings 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting winning opening 2004 is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball is low. Probability ・ Not added to the number of non-time saving out balls.

Furthermore, the same phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In the normal state, one game ball wins while the start winning opening 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a specific error occurs after that, and the game ball wins in the opening winning opening 2004. Suppose. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error in which the base value cannot be calculated accurately due to the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the machine is out. Do not use spheres for base calculations.

Also in this case, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in connection with the winning of any of the starting winning openings 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball during a specific error is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting winning opening 2004 is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball. Balls are not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of game balls that have won prizes during the operation of the electric accessory under specific conditions (at the end of the reduced working hours, at the time of a big hit of the special symbol fluctuation display game, at the time of a specific error, etc.). There are cases where it is used for calculating the base value and cases where it is not used for calculating the base value, and it is possible to start the fluctuation of the special figure in any winning.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the look-ahead effect of the pending special symbol variation display game, the first prize that is won in the start winning opening 2004 in a short time state is not the target of the look-ahead effect, and is in the normal state. The second prize won in may be the target of the look-ahead effect. On the contrary, the first prize that is won in the start winning opening 2004 in a short time state may not be the target of the look-ahead effect, and the second prize that is won in the normal state may not be the target of the look-ahead effect.

Although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the probability change state (ST) or the electric support state to the normal state.

[10. Record of game history]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described.

[10-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that records gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines from among a plurality of effects that match the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and determines the determined effects from the liquid crystal display device. Display at 1600. At that time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 decides to display a specific effect (for example, two specific effects out of three types of super reach) among a plurality of prepared effects, the switching of the gaming state is the starting point. As a result, how many times the special symbol variation display game was played and the specific effect appeared (in other words, at what rotation the effect appeared) on the liquid crystal display device 1600 together with the progress of the game. indicate.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 110, Super Reach 1 appears at the 34th rotation at 10:25, and the result of the special symbol variation display game is lost, and at the 127th rotation at 10:54. Super Reach 2 appeared, the result of the special symbol variation display game was lost, Super Reach 2 appeared at 428th rotation at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol variation display game was a probable change jackpot. Is displayed.

The display of the jackpot history (for example, the history of the jackpot at the 15th rotation and the jackpot at the 50th rotation) can be confirmed on the data display provided in the hall, but the specific effect that has appeared by the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players determine whether the pachinko machine 1 is performing well or not from the extent to which a specific effect appears (for example, if Super Reach 2 appears within 50 rotations after the end of the jackpot, it is considered that the jackpot will be won in a short time). In order to meet the expectations of such players, the degree of appearance of the production is visually displayed. Also, since the game ball is not fired when the player is checking the degree of appearance of the effect, if a display showing the degree of appearance of all of the multiple effects prepared is displayed, the player will display each effect. It takes time to confirm the degree of appearance of the game console, and the operation of the game console may decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (reach effect with high expectation for a big hit) among the reach effects. Further, the appearance history for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (effect operation button 220C or the like).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the variation number and the information of the appearance of the effect. Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the information on the number of fluctuations and the appearance of the effect based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (such as the effect operation button 220C) is operated, not all the effects that have appeared, but the number of fluctuations required until a limited specific effect appears is added and displayed. You just have to do the processing.

Further, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during business, the error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 and notified to the employees in the hall. In this notification mode, the error screen shown in FIG. 111A is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, or the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 111B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 to notify the cause of the error. The error signal shown in FIG. 112 is output from the external terminal plate 784. Typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 113, 114, and 115. The error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is notified to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 so that the employees in the hall can know the cause. For example, the code defined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, when the cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is defective, "0" is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED in the right of the door is displayed. Lights blue.

However, the error occurs due to various causes such as a minor failure of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a connector disconnection), a serious failure requiring parts replacement, and a fraudulent act.

The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must search for the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate the machine. It takes time and cost to search for the cause of the error, and the suspension of operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error causes a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know the detailed information of the error that has occurred, the error can be resolved at an early stage, and the operation stop time of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened.

More specifically, the hall uses a hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on the signal output from the external terminal board 784. However, in order to search for the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable that "the number of winnings in the general winning opening", "the number of winnings in the large winning opening", "the number of passing through the gate", and "normal symbol fluctuation". Game history information such as "number" is required. If the pachinko machine 1 is out of order, it will be solved by repair or parts replacement, so there is no big problem. It may interfere with the business of the company and eventually make the hall difficult to manage.

When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of terminals of the connector used for the external terminal board 784 increases, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Furthermore, since events such as "winning to the general winning opening", "winning to the big winning opening", "passing through the gate", and "normal symbol fluctuates" occur frequently, if all the data is output from the pachinko machine 1, the data will be displayed. A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the data, which increases the burden on the hall.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1, and the stored data can be referred to later. By doing so, it became possible to confirm the details of the process leading up to the occurrence of the error.

In addition, the time of occurrence of events (number of general winning openings, number of large winning openings, number of gate passages, number of normal symbol fluctuations, etc.) that occurred in the process up to the occurrence of these errors is recorded, so how long is it? You can see how many events have occurred in. For example, it can be seen that the number of winnings in the general winning opening was 50 per minute.

If the date and time of occurrence is recorded for each event, the amount of data used for searching for the cause of error increases, and it takes time to search for the cause of error. Therefore, when a predetermined number or more of events occur in a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), the error information may be output and notified.

For example, since it is possible to win a prize in any game state, it is advisable to output error information and notify when there are more than a predetermined number of prizes in a predetermined time. Therefore, it is advisable to set a predetermined time from the start to the end of the big hit game, and output error information to notify when a predetermined number or more of the big winning openings are won in the predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs the data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of this embodiment. As for the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 116, a game history recording process (step S1023) is added to the peripheral control unit power-on processing described above with reference to FIG. 60.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory when the received command is a predetermined command based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310. The game history is recorded as the event occurrence date and time in the format shown in FIG. 118, for example. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be DRAM, but it is preferable to record in SRAM, which does not require a refresh operation and consumes low power, in consideration of retaining the stored contents even when the power is cut off.

The game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the peripheral control unit routine process, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped in the middle and some of the effects are not executed. That is, even if some of the effects are not executed (even if all the effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed on the main control board 1310 does not change, and the privilege given to the player also changes. Since there is no such thing, the game history is recorded with priority over the production. Further, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to the game control, the game history recording process can be shared among a plurality of models of pachinko machines.

Next, the process when the memory capacity of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit will be described. When the amount of recorded game history data has reached the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not have to be updated. That is, the information recorded in the memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and each time the peripheral control unit 1511 is used. Processing can be reduced.

Further, when the capacity of the recorded game history memory has reached the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the oldest game history may be deleted, and the latest game history may be recorded. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced each time.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. Since it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed by not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, other processes (effect control, lamp) performed by the peripheral control unit 1511 are performed. Control and sound control can be executed reliably, and new processing (for example, processing that is executed over multiple peripheral control unit steady processing because there is not enough processing time) can be executed using the free processing time. Alternatively, a process (for example, a process of switching the selection table) that is executed once in several peripheral control unit steady processes because it is not necessary to execute each time may be executed.

Immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), the received command may be analyzed (step S1022) and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recording condition setting table. The game history recording condition setting table is a command recorded as a game history among the commands received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control unit 1511. Register the type, that is, the event recorded as the game history.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the conditions for generating the command and the purpose of recording as the game history are as follows.

For example, when the start opening 1 winning command and the starting opening 2 winning command detect the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 2002 and the starting winning opening 2004, respectively, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511. , Peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each starting winning opening. Further, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the change of the special symbol, respectively, and the peripheral control units 1511 are the special symbols 1 and 2, respectively. The number of fluctuations can be counted.

Further, the power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the time of power-on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire a ram clear operation or the like. The change start state command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of the change of the special symbol. There are four states that can be distinguished by the change start state command: low probability / time saving, low probability / non-time saving, high probability / time saving, and high probability / non-time saving. You can count the number of fluctuations. Here, the low probability is a state in which the probability that a jackpot is derived in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game is a normal probability, and the high probability is a jackpot in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game. Is higher than usual. The time reduction is the time from when the above-mentioned second start door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) to a higher probability than when it is not, or when the normal symbol starts to fluctuate. The frequency with which the second start opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) is higher than that in the non-time saving state, such as being shortened. Along with this, there is a high probability that an effect with a short time in one special symbol variation display game will be selected.

The big winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins the big winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively. A command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening.

The large prize opening 1 winning command (less than the specified winning amount) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than the specified winning amount) will win only the specified number of game balls or less by the end of the round at the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. If not, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing of each large winning opening (for example, from 1 second later to before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 sends a command. You can get the winning status in one round for each big winning opening. The large winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the specified winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the specified winning) are rounded by winning more than the specified number of game balls in the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. When is completed, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when each large winning opening is closed (for example, from 1 second later to before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 sends a command. You can get the status of winning in one round for each big winning opening. It should be noted that this command is transmitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing of each of the major winning openings 2005 and 2006 by detecting the specified number of winning balls (for example, 10) specified in one round and the large winning openings. There is a possibility that an undetected game ball may exist in the big winning opening when the game is closed, and this is to accurately grasp the winning situation even at the time of such an over winning.

The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is operated or the accessory continuous operation device is operated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires the change to the jackpot state. You can count the number of big hits. The transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot state and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the status after the jackpot.

The small hit OP command is for opening the big winning opening in a relatively short time (for example, one opening time is 1.8 seconds, or the total of multiple opening times is less than 1.8 seconds). Therefore, when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small hit), a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small hits.

The normal symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the stop symbol of the normal symbol and can count the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol. When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003.

Even if a special symbol or a normal symbol is not drawn even if a prize is won in the start winning opening or the gate is passed (such as when there is no overflow or memory), the main control board 1310 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1511 to the starting opening 1. A winning command, a starting port 2 winning command, and a general gate passage command are transmitted. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to the starting port and the number of balls passing through the gate unit.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the error occurrence timing and count the number of error occurrences.

The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command are each sent as a command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins in each general winning opening 2001, and the surroundings. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening 2001. The general winning opening winning command may be determined by the number of general winning openings 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the above-mentioned example illustrates the case where three general winning openings 2001 are provided. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with four general winning openings 2001. Therefore, there are four types of general winning opening winning commands, from the general winning opening 1 winning command to the general winning opening 4 winning command. The command is defined.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recorded in a memory.

The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in a memory in order of event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time, and the time when the main control board 1310 detects the event occurrence is notified to the peripheral control unit 1511. The peripheral control device 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the date and time when the event occurred is recorded in the particle size up to the minute, but it may be recorded up to the second.

By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 118, it is possible to know the details of the event generated in connection with the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 (for example, the change in the game state, the result of the variable display game, etc.). .. For example, the power-on command of history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, RAM was cleared from the contents of the command, and the game started in a low probability and non-time saving state. I understand. That is, the hall started business at 15:30, the power of the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, and the player started hitting after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette) and won the general prize opening 2001. I understand. In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start event of history number 4 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation is performed from the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result of the display game. The special symbol 1 fluctuation start event of history number 6 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation display game is based on the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result of. Although the result of the special symbol variation display game is not shown in FIG. 118, each special symbol variation display game is based on the numerical value indicating the result of the variation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the special symbol variation. The result of the variable display game (loss, normal per 4 rounds, high probability per 4 rounds, high probability per 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

Next, a method for the hall to refer to the information (game history) recorded in the memory will be described.

First, a history output interface 1590 that outputs information recorded in a memory from the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided. Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

Further, when the data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the data collection terminal, the game history recorded in the memory is output from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured by the history output terminal provided in the peripheral control unit 1511, or may be provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1511. The data collection terminal may be owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range wireless communication (for example, Bluetooth®).

The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history is a command that is not transmitted when the pachinko machine 1 is playing a normal game even if it is a history reference command dedicated to the game history output (FIG. 117). A command when a special condition (operation) is performed under a command (command not defined in) may be used as a history reference command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Further, a history reference command may be transmitted even if the command is transmitted during a normal game, on condition that an event that cannot (or is unlikely to occur) occurs. For example, when 50 pieces are won in the starting opening or the general winning opening in one minute. Further, the game history may be output when the commands used for game control are received in a special order that is not normally possible.

An operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display device) may be provided on the back surface side (a place invisible to the player) of the pachinko machine 1 to display the game history.

FIG. 119 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a peripheral control board and its surroundings.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and also transmits the effect display drive board 4450 and control commands and various information (various data) via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It controls the drawing of the peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges with the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and also controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying hours, minutes, and seconds.

As shown in FIG. 119, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that controls the execution operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a V blank from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Peripheral control unit that is executed each time a signal is input Various information that is continued across the steady processing (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LED light emission modes, etc. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing specified schedule data, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states and special effects) Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing flags, etc., and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally. It is described as).

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. By supplying backup power to the electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM"), the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 931 is provided with an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 1511d retains the stored contents. You can't do it and lose its content.

Further, a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with power by a backup power supply 1513 different from the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board 931. The game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which the power is supplied by the backup power supply 1513, and the stored contents can be retained even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and may have a power supply capacity capable of holding data in at least a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to one month.

FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the peripheral control CPU package together with the peripheral control MPU.

FIG. 120 (A) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in which an area for storing the game history is configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, the effect control area where power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area where power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. Be done.

When the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. Area) The data in 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 120 (B) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that constitutes an area for storing the game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, both an effect control area in which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and a game history storage area in which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 120 (B), when the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control is performed. The data of the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. Therefore, it is preferable that the effect control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are physically separated from each other.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured by a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which the power is not supplied without providing the backup power supply 1513.

In either form of FIGS. 120A and 120B, the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d can be any method different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. good. For example, if a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time even after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initially initialized. It may be changed.

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from the normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the main control board 1310 continues to transmit the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is being operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. When the power is turned on, or when the power-on command is continuously received, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing the means for initializing the data in the game history storage area in this way, for example, even if the game machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e is restarted, so that no reset is applied.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board side motor drive data for transmitting to drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on game board 5. The door-side motor drive data for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit and outputting the drive signal to the electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 is frame-decorated drive. Transmission from the serial I / O port for the amplifier board motor to the frame decorative drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, or to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal is driven by frame decoration from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Send to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal of is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , It is input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the event that occurred during the game is recorded as the game history according to the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the event occurred during the game. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall is closed) to understand the performance and failure of the gaming machine. Further, since the game history is stored in the non-volatile memory (SRAM to which the backup power supply is input), the game history can be confirmed even after the game machine is restarted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 117, 118, etc., various information is recorded together with the occurrence time. Further, for example, when a prize is won in the starting prize opening 1, (1) the fact that the starting winning opening 1 is won, (2) the time when the starting winning opening 1 is won, and (3) before the starting winning opening 1 is won. Like the event that occurred, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. 112 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the minimum necessary information (information indicating the fact that the above-mentioned (1) starting winning opening is won) is output from the external terminal board 784, such as when the starting winning opening is won, and in a special case (for example, an error). This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed when investigating the cause of the problem. This is because if all the information stored inside at the time of winning the starting prize opening is output from the external terminal board 784, the amount of output of the information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 increases, which may be a burden on the hall. Because. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded inside is recorded in the pachinko machine via the external terminal board 784. It was output to the outside of 1 so that the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 could be confirmed in special cases.

[10-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine that records and outputs the game history will be described. It should be noted that some of the modifications described below are intended to modify a part of the above-described embodiment and form a part of the embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the event (command type) and the event occurrence date and time are recorded for a predetermined command. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is finite, and it is difficult to record all of the enormous amount of events that occur during the game over a long period of time. Therefore, in the modified example 1 (compact plan 1), the change in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events generated in the state are recorded.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recording condition setting table of the modified example 1.

In the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification, the commands recorded as the game history are defined separately as a command to be counted and a command to trigger a state change, and a command in which both attributes are set. There is also. It should be noted that the column of information that can be counted and the column of change of state that can be acquired are provided for convenience of explanation, and when the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is sufficient. ..

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command for which the attribute to be counted is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered the issuance of the command as a result of the command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, the record that counts the number of events by updating the state of the game history recorded in the memory as a result of command analysis. To add.

For example, the power-on command, the change start state command, the jackpot OP command, the jackpot operation end transition destination command, and the error display command are commands issued by the state change, and are power-on, special symbol change display start, respectively. It can be grasped as a change of the state of the start of the big hit state, the end of the big hit state, and the occurrence of the error state.

In addition, the counting command is used to count the number of events that triggered the issuance of the counting command. Specifically, the starting opening 1 winning command and the starting opening 2 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each starting winning opening. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of fluctuations of each special symbol. The large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening. The large prize opening 1 winning command (less than or equal to the specified winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than or equal to the specified winning number) can count the number of rounds completed with the specified number of winning or less. The large winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the specified winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the specified winning) can count the number of rounds completed in excess of the specified number of winnings (that is, by over winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal symbol stop command can count the number of fluctuations in the normal symbol. The command to pass through the gate can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate. The error display command can count the number of error occurrences. The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the first modification.

The game history of the modification 1 is the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurred, and the state from a predetermined starting point. Includes the cumulative number of counting events detected until the end of (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the time when the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is initialized. The states in which the counting events are recorded separately are assumed to be five states: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state. The state may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the first modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 122, as counting events, the starting opening 1 winning number, the starting opening 2 winning number, the special symbol 1 variation number, the special symbol 2 variation number, the general winning opening 1 winning number, the general winning opening 2 winning number, The number of general winning openings 3 winning, the number of large winning openings 1 winning, the number of large winning openings 2 winning, the number of passing through the gate, and the number of normal symbol changes are recorded. The number of events other than those shown may be counted.

Two bytes is sufficient for the storage area of the cumulative number of each counting event. In particular, the data that is not derived so frequently and the cumulative number does not increase (for example, the number of general winning openings) may be 1 byte, and the other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the data in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing the 1-byte data and the 2-byte data.

When a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time when the event occurs are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. A new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, but a new record may be created at the start of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, while the counting event is counted, the data may not be stored in the new record created, or 0 may be stored as the initial value. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period during which the counting event is counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of the counting event in the relevant period is stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and recorded in the work area. Numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event) is recorded as a game history, the count value of the counting event is set as the game of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

That is, every time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. , Will be initialized by normal ram clear operation. Specifically, for example, in a low probability / non-time saving state, the game history information in which 50 winning numbers in the starting winning opening 1 are recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko of the modified example 1. In the machine 1, after the game state changes, it is recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the ram clear operation is performed with the low probability and non-time saving state, the number of winnings of 50 is initialized to 0.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the counting value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Further, even when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process may be executed. In this case, the recording of the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is continuously executed in the current state, and the cumulative number of counting events does not have to be stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d from the peripheral control RAM 1511c when the state changes. Further, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced every time. can. Further, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the latest game history can be confirmed.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent unnecessary execution of the process and reduce the process of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As described above, in the modification 1, the switching of the states of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (number of winnings, number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state during the switching is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1 is characterized in that more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is internally recorded.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 1, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d Information (game history) is not written. That is, if fraud is performed in a state where a new record cannot be created in the game history storage area (the same game state is continuing), it may be difficult to detect the fraud. As described above, the hall can confirm the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 1, the hall can confirm the information written in the game history storage area. As long as the game state does not change, the information is not written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the information of the current state (game history) cannot be confirmed. Even in such a case, a check function that can detect fraud at an early stage may be provided.

Specifically, the first record (the latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the game history of the latest state is recorded and the second record (the record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the game history of the current state is recorded). If the result of comparison with is satisfied with a predetermined condition, an error may be notified.

For example, in the so-called right-handed pachinko machine 1, which launches a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a in a high-probability / short-time state or a big hit game state, the transition from the high-probability / short-time state to the big hit game state. However, if the game transitions to a high-probability / short-time state after the jackpot game state ends, even if the state is switched, it is usually right-handed, so there is a possibility of winning the general winning opening on the left side of the game area 5a. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent high-probability / time-saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be notified. The permissible value of the difference in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening between the states is one, and if a difference of two or more occurs, an error may be notified. This is because when the hand is released from the launch handle, the launch force becomes uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. 112. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function predicts the game from the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it will hit right because it is in a high probability and time saving state), so an unfamiliar player can use it. There is a possibility of detecting an error when hitting unexpectedly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, but may only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and may not notify the player. By doing so, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and trouble with the player can be prevented.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-3. Compact plan 2]
In the above-mentioned modification 1, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events in each state during the change is recorded. Was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of recurring state. Therefore, in the modified example 2 (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 121) as in the first modification.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 123, the game history of the modification 2 is composed of the history of state events and the cumulative number of each counting event for each state. The history of the state event includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time when the state change event occurs. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states of low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state. To. The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in the second modification are the starting port 1 winning number (starting port 1 winning command), the starting port 2 winning number (starting port 2 winning command), and special. Symbol 1 variation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 variation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning opening 1 winning number (general winning opening 1 winning command), general winning opening 2 winning number (general) Winning opening 2 winning command), general winning opening 3 winning number (general winning opening 3 winning command), large winning opening 1 winning number (large winning opening 1 winning command), large winning opening 2 winning number (large winning opening 2 winning command) ), The number of gate passages (normal symbol gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command).

The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 123, when a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time when the event occurs are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by the state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the non-volatile memory, and the above-mentioned counting event corresponds to the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up in the event of a power failure, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the modification 2, the change of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each state type is recorded, so that the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. You can record a long game history without increasing the capacity of the game.

[10-4. Compact plan 3]
In the above-mentioned modification 2, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded in the state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing of state switching may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each state type. Therefore, in the modified example 3 (compact plan 3), the change of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In the third modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 121) as in the first modification.

In the modification example 3, the same event as the event recorded in the modification example 1 is recorded by using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG. 121.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the modification example 3.

As shown in FIG. 124, the game history of the modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Further, the game history of the modification 3 includes the cumulative time of each state. The cumulative time is included so that the hall can estimate the number of event occurrences (for example, the number of jackpot occurrences) from the cumulative time. There are five states in which counting events are recorded separately: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state, but they are further subdivided. Counting events may be recorded.

The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in the third modification are the starting port 1 winning number (starting port 1 winning command), the starting port 2 winning number (starting port 2 winning command), and special. Symbol 1 variation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 variation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning opening 1 winning number (general winning opening 1 winning command), general winning opening 2 winning number (general) Winning opening 2 winning command), general winning opening 3 winning number (general winning opening 3 winning command), large winning opening 1 winning number (large winning opening 1 winning command), large winning opening 2 winning number (large winning opening 2 winning command) ), The number of gate passages (normal symbol gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command). The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 124, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of the above-mentioned counting events is recorded corresponding to the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up in the event of a power failure, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the modification 2, the change of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each state type is recorded, so that the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. You can record a long game history without increasing the capacity of the game.

As described above, with respect to the modified examples 1 to 3, when the condition of temporarily recording in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) when an event occurs by the game history recording process and writing to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is satisfied. The data in the work area is written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Further, in the normal ram clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Here, I would like to briefly touch on the sales of the hall. In many cases, the hall has fixed business hours, for example, the opening time is 10:00 and the closing time is 23:00. For this reason, it may be difficult for a clerk to monitor whether or not a player is playing an illegal game during a time when many players are present, such as a time immediately after the store opens or a time in the evening. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of pachinko players will decrease, and if there is a pachinko machine with a high probability and a short time just before the store closes, the pachinko machine with a high probability and a short time will be initialized for the next day's business, and the probability is low. It may be in a non-time saving state. In this case, since the number of pachinko players is small, it is possible to monitor pachinko machines with a high probability and a short time, so it is possible to know whether the latest game has been fraudulent. In other words, considering the situation that some pachinko machines do not require the latest game history, it is possible to provide an efficient game machine by allowing the clerk to select whether to keep the latest information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by the ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for the event that occurred after the latest event is deleted, and the game history is stored for the event that occurred before the latest event. The game history stored in the area is left. That is, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, the information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and the information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately for. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all the events recorded in the work area, the clerk only needs to cause a change of state of the pachinko machine, and if you want to erase the record of the event recorded in the work area, The clerk may perform a ram clear operation. As mentioned above, it was decided to delete only the game history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the latest event without deleting all the game history by the ram clear operation, before the latest event. This is because the clerk has not seen the events that have occurred so far (because there are many players, they cannot see them).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the information that the starting winning slot has been won, but also the winning of the general winning slot that is not related to the lottery is temporarily recorded in the work area. Even if (a symbol that starts to change by winning a prize in the start winning opening and the lottery result of winning is shown by the stop mode of this symbol) does not change, while the game ball is launched into the game area 5a. Is characterized by collecting game history. That is, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed in the wake of a winning lottery, but a process that may be executed at any time while the power is being supplied to the pachinko machine.

In addition, in the case of a low probability and non-time saving state, the game ball is fired to the start winning opening 2002 so that the game ball wins, like a so-called left-handed hit or a choppy hit. In such a case, the starting winning opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 should be appropriately won. However, if there is no prize in the general prize opening 2001 (or very few), but many game balls have won in the starting prize opening 2002, or conversely, there is no winning in the starting winning opening 2002 (or). (Extremely few), but if many game balls have won in the general winning opening 2001, there is a possibility that fraud has been committed. Therefore, the first winning opening and the second winning opening in which the game ball wins at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning opening is a predetermined multiplication factor of the number of winnings in the second winning opening. When the number exceeds, an error may be notified.

Further, instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. With the above-mentioned detection method, there is a possibility that an error is detected when an unfamiliar player makes an unexpected hit. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, but may only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and may not notify the player. By doing so, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and trouble with the player can be prevented.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated in a plurality of games is collected as a game history. Since there is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded, if you record for each game (1 fluctuation), you cannot record many games (long time), so you can keep more game records. There is.

[11. Game performance setting function]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has, for example, a setting function for changing the operating ratio of a condition device as a game performance.

[11-1. Basic configuration of a pachinko machine with a setting function]
FIG. 125 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting unit, and FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting unit as viewed from the back surface side in an open state. FIG. 127. Is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126 as viewed from the back surface side in a closed door state, and FIG. 128 is a view showing a setting portion of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 125 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 128 (A), the setting board 970 has a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode, a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value, and a change. A setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the set value and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that accepts a setting change operation.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control unit 952. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control unit 952. The confirmed setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. As will be described later, the main control board 1310 may control the components on the setting board 970.

The setting key 971 is a signal that triggers a change to the setting mode by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and maintaining the short-circuited or open state of the contacts by turning the key to the set position. It is a switch that outputs. It should be noted that the setting key 971 may not be provided and may be shared with another switch. In this case, the setting mode is started by operating the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press), and the setting mode is ended by long pressing the setting change switch 972 in the setting mode. May be good.

Further, the setting mode may be started / ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, the setting mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting mode.

By doing so, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation by the closing of the setting change switch 972.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to switch and select a set value (1 to 6) in order. That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is incremented by 1, and when the setting value = 6 is operated and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the set value = 1. The setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. The set value is not limited to 6 steps, but may be a smaller step (for example, 2 steps) or a larger step (for example, 8 steps).

Further, the setting change switch 972 may not be provided, and the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in 3 steps, the key can be inserted and removed in the neutral position (normal position), turning it to the left is an operation to start the setting mode, and turning it to the right is the setting value to be set. It becomes an operation to select (when turned to the right, it functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation capable of holding the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation in which the right position is not held (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

The set value changes the operation ratio of the condition device (that is, the hit probability of the special symbol). The set value = 1 has a low hit probability, and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability variable jackpot ratio, the time reduction (ST) ratio after the jackpot, the number of time reductions, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability of hitting a regular figure, the general winning opening, the starting winning opening, and the big winning opening Various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls, may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that both switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be configured as a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured as a momentary toggle switch.

The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. Further, the set value selected may be determined by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, the operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, the operation of the effect operation button 220C, and the ball rental. The selected setting may be confirmed by operating the button, operating the return button, detecting the winning of the game ball to the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, and the like. The operation unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in the illustrated example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board 970 in order to set the gaming performance on the pachinko machine 1, but one or two switches are provided on the setting board 970. It is enough to provide it.

Further, the setting change operation may be possible only by the RAM clear switch 954 without providing any of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973. For example, the setting mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting mode for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, the RAM clear switch 954 The set value can be confirmed by operating (holding down) for a predetermined time or longer. Further, the setting mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the setting key 971). .. The setting display 974 may be configured by a number of LEDs having a settable value instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up and the set value is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED that displays the type of the payout error. However, this error type indicator and the setting indicator 974 are also used. The selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be turned on when displaying the set value. Further, the display of the error type may be a lighting display (not blinking), and the display of the set value may be a blinking display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but it may be connected to the power supply board (not shown) in the power supply board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 side by side with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power supply switch 932 operated at the time of setting change are arranged in the vicinity, and the operability of setting change is performed. Can be improved.

Further, as will be described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

As yet another form, the setting board 970 may be configured not as an independent board but also as a part of a payout control board 951, a power supply board, or a main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on any of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 126, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface of the lower part (that is, the frame side instead of the game board 5) of the main body frame 4 constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 127, When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so that it is difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. In this way, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971 and hinders the insertion of the key into the keyhole of the setting key 971, making it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation unit). Functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval as at least a part of the setting board 970. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when all of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the pachinko machine 1 is set during operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5). It is possible to make the operation of the board 970 difficult and suppress fraudulent acts in which the player changes the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (means for making setting change difficult) facing the setting board 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but may be another member. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 5 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The setting change difficulty means composed of the members provided facing the setting board 970 may be a cover covering the setting board 970. In this case, it is advisable to cover the setting key 971 that triggers the start of the setting mode with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in the setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover that prevents inadvertent operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). Provide a body (for example, a door-shaped lid that can be opened during operation). Further, a second cover body for covering various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 is provided on the outer frame 5. The second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 2 to cover various control boards. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the start of the setting mode due to an inadvertent operation, and it is possible to suppress an illegal act in which an unauthorized player changes the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

The setting board 970 may be arranged in the vicinity of the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated at the time of changing the setting are arranged in the vicinity. By doing so, the operability when starting the setting mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is initially equipped with the game control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side. However, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are from the back side. It is installed in a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back surface side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, and are therefore provided at positions that can be operated from the back surface side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, so that the setting board 970 is operated during the game to suppress fraudulent acts of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switch on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for selecting the player's platform, it is desirable that the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 127, like the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player does not know the set value. Is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visually obfuscating means for hiding the display content of the setting display 974 and making it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

FIG. 128 (B) is a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other, and the setting key 971 is used. The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not located in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971, and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it faces the right frame member 40. It is difficult to check the current settings of pachinko machines.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a modified example of the setting board 970.

In this modification as well, the setting board 970 is provided with the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974, as in the above-mentioned example. However, in this modification, the setting key 971 is arranged sideways on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, the setting board 970 of this modification is installed not on the side surface side of the main body frame 4 but on the back surface side so that the keyhole faces the side surface. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the side surface (that is, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. The head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 129, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards, and even if the difficulty of board placement is reduced, the setting board 970 is operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine having the setting unit will be described. In this modification, the setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4, and is connected to the main control board 1310.

FIG. 130 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine of this modified example, FIG. 131 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting unit from behind, and FIG. 132 is shown in FIG. 131. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown from the back.

The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 128 (A) or the one shown in FIG. 129 (A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, and the main control MPU 1311 Controls the display of the setting display 974.

The functions and configurations of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as those in the above-described embodiment, and common description will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used in combination, and the selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. Normally, the base value of the provisional section (the section currently being measured) and the base value of the fixed section (the straight line section) are switched and displayed on the base display 1317 at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, in the setting mode, the selected (next set) setting value is displayed, and while the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 152), the current setting value is displayed.

In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, although four digits are used for displaying the base value, only a predetermined one digit (for example, the rightmost digit) may be used for displaying the set value, and "-" may be displayed. In the digits not used in the display of the set value, other numbers, characters, and symbols may be displayed instead of "-" as long as they are not used in the display of the base value. Further, when displaying the set value, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the set value is displayed in six stages of alphabets A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Further, it is preferable that the set value is blinked while the set value is selected in the setting mode, and the confirmed set value is lit. In addition, the current set value should be lit and displayed. Further, in the base display, the first two digits indicate the type of display data, and the numbers are not displayed. Therefore, the setting value may be displayed using the most significant digit. When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used in combination, the setting value is displayed with priority during the setting mode and the setting confirmation, so that the base value is calculated but the base value is not displayed. .. After that, when the confirmation of the setting mode and the set value is completed, the base display 1317 resumes the display of the base value.

That is, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is also used as the base display 1317, it is included in the category of the invention described in the present specification. In this way, by displaying the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 so as not to be confused during the confirmation of the setting mode and the setting value, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation at the time of setting change and erroneous recognition of the setting value.

Further, even when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not shared, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off or all may be turned on while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, when the confirmation of the setting mode and the set value is completed, the base display 1317 resumes the display of the base value. By not displaying a plurality of displays on the main control board box 1320 during confirmation of the setting mode and the setting value, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation at the time of setting change and erroneous recognition of the setting value.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed on a part of the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes or notches for operating the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. Is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening / closing direction differs depending on the direction of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted vertically into the board from the front of the board, the main control board box 1320 is vertically separated from the setting board 970 on the front surface and the back surface of the setting board 970, or a front side box body ( Alternatively, the cover) and the back side box body may be configured to be openable and closable with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted from the side in the direction in which the substrate is stretched, the main control board box 1320 has the setting board 970 in the stretching direction of the front side box (or cover) and the back side box of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure that slides in (the insertion direction of the key 975) to separate.

In this modification, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in FIG. 131, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface (left side in FIG. 131) of the game board 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 132, the game board 5 is attached. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow. Therefore, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the keys on the setting board 970 and the like The operation of the switch is difficult. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval as at least a part of the setting board 970. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when all of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the pachinko machine 1 is set during operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5). By operating the board 970, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (means for making setting change difficult) facing the setting board 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but may be another member. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 5 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is initially equipped with the game control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side. However, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are from the back side. It is installed in a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back surface side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, and are therefore provided at positions that can be operated from the back surface side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, so that the setting board 970 is operated during the game to suppress fraudulent acts of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switch on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for selecting the player's platform, it is desirable that the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 132, like the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player does not know the set value. Is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visually obfuscating means for hiding the display content of the setting display 974 and making it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 130, a view of the setting board 970 from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIGS. 128 (B) and 129 (B). .. In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, so that the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it faces the right frame member 40. It is no longer possible to check the current settings of the pachinko machine.

Next, the process related to the setting change will be described.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 133 is compared with the initialization process described above in FIG. 21, and the point where the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key is operated (step S17, step S30) and the CPU initial setting process (step). The difference is that the setting change process is performed in S28). The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIG. 21 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes an initialization process by executing a main control program. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determination (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated and the output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data and the game state (for example, probabilistic state, time saving state, hold storage of special symbol or normal symbol, prize ball) The data of) is left, the other data is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30). , Step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff and the checksum in step S48. Compare (verify) with the stored checksum (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( (Other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased in step S24. Proceed to.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag abnormality (step S20) that has not been performed, a RAM abnormality (step S22) in which the checksums of the RAMs do not match, and an abnormality (step S24) of the work for base calculation. Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area). (For example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the hold storage of the special symbol or the normal symbol, the information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base is calculated. Area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

In the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 are different from those shown in the figure. You may clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for base calculation for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data)). Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear switch is operated, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIGS. 22 and 102 is the presence / absence of a process (steps S50, S52) in which a check code is calculated and stored from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

134 and 135 are flowcharts showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing, and FIG. 134 shows a setting board 970 connected to a payout control board 951 (or integrally configured with a payout control board 951). FIG. 135 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is integrally configured with the main control board 1310).

First, the setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 134 (A) are linked will be described.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether or not the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, so the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change allowable state generating means. As the start conditions of the setting mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, and the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit (prepaid card). It is not necessary to start the setting mode when there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting mode. The determination of these conditions may be performed after the main control MPU 1311, not the payout control unit 952, receives the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is trying to change the setting. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting mode.

(2) When the setting mode is started, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process before the setting change. The RAM clear process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol or the normal symbol hold storage). , Information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in the procedure (6), it does not have to be cleared in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the setting mode is in progress. For the notification in the setting mode, the initial operation of the accessory is performed, or a predetermined display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when the procedure or status of setting change is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting change work. Because it interferes with.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting mode in accordance with the notification of the setting mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all the LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting mode by stopping the detection of the winning ball and the out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting mode by stopping the output of the launch permission signal, stopping the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functioning as a launch disabling means. good. When the firing of the game ball is stopped during the setting mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period may be regarded as an error, and an error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period.

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the set value can be selected from 1 to 6, the set value = 0 is the state where the setting is not set, and the setting mode cannot be ended when the set value = 0, and the game (launching the game ball). , Variable display games, etc.) do not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in the above-mentioned procedure (1), it may be determined at least once before the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973 is determined. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change allowable state generating means for determining whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is confirmed.

(9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected set value, and the set value is confirmed. Is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or may display the confirmed setting value blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting mode is terminated, so that the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. By this setting change end command, the confirmed setting value is notified to the main control MPU 1311.

(13) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification during the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

It should be noted that the notification (including the game stop and the launch stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in the procedure (5) is considered to be a mere notification to the outside (player, hall employee), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is captured from the viewpoint of finding fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting mode ends and a predetermined time elapses. This is because when the setting is changed, the predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it becomes easy to detect that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the launch of the game ball is stopped within a predetermined period after the end of the setting mode, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period is regarded as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear process after this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) with the set value and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the normal symbol). The data of the hold memory and the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clear process after the setting change, the set value is not initialized unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change.

Then, the setting mode is terminated.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is integrally configured with the payout control board 951). , The main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate to execute the setting change process.

In the above-mentioned process, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, the signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 may be transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses of a predetermined frequency), or a power supply voltage. However, a signal having an intermediate potential that is neither a ground voltage nor a ground voltage may be output. This is a main control board from the payout control unit 952 to send a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 by a signal that cannot occur by short-circuiting the terminal in order to prevent fraudulent activity that short-circuits the terminal of the setting key 971 and activates the setting mode. This is because it is preferable to transmit to 1310.

Next, the setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 134 (B) are linked will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, so the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

(2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the set value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and transmits the set value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout control unit 952 displays the set value notified by the set value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

In the above, the set value stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) is displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the set value and stores it in the payout control unit 952. The set value may be displayed on the setting display 974.

Next, the setting change process by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 135 (A) will be described.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change allowable state generating means. Whether or not the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch. The detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may transmit a main body frame opening detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch. Further, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, so the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting mode. As the start conditions of the setting mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, and the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit (prepaid card). It is not necessary to start the setting mode when there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting mode. In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is trying to change the setting. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting mode.

(3) When the setting mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear processing before the setting change when the setting change start command is received from the payout control unit 952. The RAM clear process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol or the normal symbol hold storage). , Information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in the procedure (6), it does not have to be cleared in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the setting mode is in progress. For the notification in the setting mode, the initial operation of the accessory is performed, or a predetermined display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when the procedure or status of setting change is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting change work. Because it interferes with.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting mode in accordance with the notification of the setting mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all the LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting mode by stopping the detection of the winning ball and the out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting mode by stopping the output of the launch permission signal, stopping the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functioning as a launch disabling means. good. When the firing of the game ball is stopped during the setting mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period may be regarded as an error, and an error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period.

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the set value can be selected from 1 to 6, the set value = 0 is the state where the setting is not set, and the setting mode cannot be ended when the set value = 0, and the game (launching the game ball). , Variable display games, etc.) do not start.

(7) After that, every time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in the above-mentioned procedure (1), it may be determined at least once before the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973 is determined. In this way, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the conditions for the setting change are satisfied (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is input from the payout control board 951) before the setting change is confirmed. Functions as a means for generating an allowable state.

(9) Further, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected set value and confirms that the set value is confirmed. It is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or may display the confirmed setting value blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting mode is terminated, so that the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification during the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

It should be noted that the notification (including the game stop and the launch stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in the procedure (5) is considered to be a mere notification to the outside (player, hall employee), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is captured from the viewpoint of finding fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting mode ends and a predetermined time elapses. This is because when the setting is changed, the predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it becomes easy to detect that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the launch of the game ball is stopped within a predetermined period after the end of the setting mode, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period is regarded as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear process after this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) with the set value and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the normal symbol). The data of the hold memory and the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clear process after the setting change, the set value is not initialized unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change.

Then, the setting mode is terminated.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is integrally configured with the main control board 1310). Since the main control board 1310 acquires the detection signal of the main body frame opening switch from the payout control board 951, the setting change process cannot be executed only by the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other. Is executing the setting change process.

Next, the setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 135 (B) are linked will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, so the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

If the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting mode in the setting change process described with reference to FIGS. 134 (A) and 135 (A), the setting mode may be invalidated and the setting mode may be temporarily stopped. Then, by shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 1 and turning on the power again, the stopped setting mode is restarted. The resumption of the setting mode may be performed from the stage where the setting mode is stopped due to error detection, or from the beginning of the setting mode (setting value = 0 when the setting value is not selected).

To change the set value, it is advisable to record the history a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting is confirmed and the confirmed setting value are stored in the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 or the peripheral control unit 1511. When the history of set values is stored in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. Furthermore, the history of changes in the recorded setting values can be output. For example, it is preferable to display the history of changes in the recorded set values on the liquid crystal display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

When the set value is changed, the measurement interval of the base value may be changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of out balls in the section currently measuring the base value is less than 52000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the gaming performance of the gaming machine is changed by the set value, by changing the section by changing the set value, it is possible to calculate the base value that does not mix different gaming performance, and it is possible to grasp the transition of the base value by changing the set value. ..

Further, when the set value is changed, the section in which the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the interval in which the base value is measured. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, it is possible to design the base value so that the base value does not change significantly by changing the set value. In such a case, it is not necessary to change the calculation interval of the base value by changing the set value.

Further, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting mode may be activated. In the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, considering the operation method and the arrangement of the operation means, the operation of the setting key 971 is less likely to be operated by mistake, so that the setting mode is activated. This is because it is considered to be the intention of the operator. Further, in the setting mode, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the gaming state and the base value are cleared. Therefore, even if the RAM clearing is desired, it is considered sufficient to activate the setting mode.

On the other hand, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without activating the setting mode. This is because it is considered that the operator wants at least RAM clear when both are operated. Further, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected at the time of turning on the power, it is not necessary to start the setting mode or clear the RAM. This is because, from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the intention of the operator is not clear.

In the RAM clearing in the above-mentioned procedures (3) and (15), the data of the gaming state is maintained, but the reserved storage of the special symbol may be erased. Since the set value changes the operation ratio of the condition device, the determination result of the random number of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved memory of the special symbol and have a new lottery performed.

On the other hand, the lottery of special symbols (extraction of winning random numbers) is performed when the game ball wins the starting prize opening, but the lottery result is judged at the start of the variable display game, so the condition after changing the set value. The random number value held and stored in is determined. Therefore, the reserved memory of the special symbol may be maintained.

Further, in the RAM clear in the above-mentioned procedures (3) and (15), the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clear processing in the setting mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased (the game state data is also erased), and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. Normally, setting changes are made between the closing of the hall and the opening of the next day, so the game status data (probability change status, time saving status, reserved memory of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information about prize balls, etc.) is deleted. There is no need to maintain it without it.

[11-2. Production on pachinko machines with setting functions]
[11-2-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Hereinafter, the details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described. First, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for controlling a special symbol and a special electric accessory. The special symbol and the special electric accessory control process are executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are collectively referred to as a starting port. In addition, the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 are collectively referred to simply as the major winning opening. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to simply as a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the game ball is accepted into the starting port, that is, the start winning is triggered (establishment of the starting condition), and each start memory information (starting information) for which this starting condition is satisfied is a big hit. A random number for determination is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery result, and if the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied), it is normal. Shift from the game state to the jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 136.

When the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won a prize in the large winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B wins the big prize opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), the big winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize at the starting port (step S112). Whether or not the game ball has won a prize at the start port is determined by the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 or the second start port sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process. It is read and performed based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

When the game ball wins a prize in the start opening (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes the start opening winning process (step S116). In the start opening winning process, a starting opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot judgment is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special symbol is used. It executes processing for executing the look-ahead effect.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the corresponding process based on the special symbol / electric accessory operation number which is the game progress state variable in which the type of the branch process executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process shifts to the branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control are performed. End the process. Since the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, it is backed up in the process when the power is turned off on the main control side.

In the process of step S130, special symbol change waiting process (step S130), special symbol changing process (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), as branching process, based on the value of the game progress state variable. Special symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol big hit stop processing (step S138), big winning opening pre-opening interval processing (step S140), big winning opening opening processing (step S142), big winning opening closing processing (step) S144) or the large winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a process of starting the change display of the special symbol on the special symbol display is performed based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the start opening.

In the special symbol changing process (step S132), a process of controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been confirmed and stopped causes the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the start opening.

In the special symbol loss stop process (step S136), a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed when the big hit game state is not generated. In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when a big hit game state is generated, a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed. In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it easy for the game ball to enter each big winning opening is performed by opening the big winning opening.

In the processing during closing of the large winning opening (step S144), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter each large winning opening is performed by changing the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the jackpot operation is completed, a process for notifying that fact is performed.

[11-2-2. Special symbol change waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state where the change display of the special symbol is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, preparations are made to start the change display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the change of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation is not 0. In addition, when a plurality of start ports are provided, the number of special symbol operation hold balls is stored for each start port. If the change of the special symbol is not reserved (the result of step S420 is "no"), the change display of the special symbol is not started, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the reserved ball number designation command as the command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for determining a big hit acquired at the time of winning a prize at the start opening.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, as a command value, the high-order byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as lower-level command data (step S458). Further, by acquiring the variation type type value from the variation type type area (step S460) and adding the variation type type value to the command value set in the process of step S452, the upper byte of the variation pattern command according to the variation type. Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, a variable state specification command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above process is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the timer interrupt process on the main control side.

[11-2-3. Special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation (step S530). The number of balls on hold for special symbol operation is stored in the buffer for the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets the jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation and the jackpot flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, the data (variable time value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern value is searched from the special symbol fluctuation time data (step S546).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting a variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The variation type type value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches for the fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value from the fluctuation time addition value data (step S552). The variable time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of pseudo-reams. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the fluctuation time addition value searched for in the process of step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched for in the process of step S546, and acquires the final fluctuation time (step S554). .. Finally, the final fluctuation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process is completed.

[11-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires a fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The variable table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the variable information source table from the variable information source address table. The fluctuation information source table includes hit (hit fluctuation selection information status table), miss (missing fluctuation selection information status table), reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table), and reach probability (special symbol reach probability) according to the game state and the like. It is a data table in which table information for referring to a table) and a variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a winning determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value (step S350). If the jackpot is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fluctuation information number search process based on the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hit-time variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number 1 for a variation pattern from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 has not won a big hit or a small hit (the result of step S350 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step). S372).

When the main control MPU 1311 does not generate a reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number 1 for a fluctuation pattern from the out-of-bounds fluctuation selection information hold table based on the number of reserved balls (step). S376).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 generates a reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information status table based on the status flag. (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the variation information number search process based on the random number 1 for the variation pattern acquired in the processes of step S360, step S378 or step S382 (step S388). Then, the variation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the variation information number search process, and the random number 2 for the variation pattern is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, the variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers, the random number 1 for the variation pattern (steps S360, S372, S378) and the random number 2 for the variation pattern (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as XX reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for variation pattern. Further, a variation pattern (value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally varied is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. The lottery method is not limited to two stages, and a lottery method may be used in three or more stages, or a random number for one fluctuation pattern may be used to directly select a fluctuation pattern.

[11-3. Explanation of the production of a pachinko machine with a setting function]
Hereinafter, the effect of the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described. Specifically, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the larger the number of game balls to be paid out for the number of special lottery. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a big hit in a non-probability state (for example, setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4: 1/270). , Setting 5: 1/250, Setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 having a setting as high as possible, the motivation for the game is increased by installing the setting suggestion effect.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a variation pattern with a random number for one variation pattern in the variation pattern selection determination process of step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 shall execute the following processing in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 is the current gaming state (whether it is a time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is executed) or a normal state other than the time saving state) and the result of the special lottery (winning a big hit). Select the variation pattern table according to (whether it is done or not). When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for a variation pattern, and based on the acquired random number for the variation pattern and the distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is out of order, it is further determined whether or not reach has occurred, a random number for the fluctuation pattern is acquired, and the acquired random number for the variation pattern and each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table are distributed. A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table based on.

FIG. 140 (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 140 (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

The variation pattern table is stored in, for example, the main control ROM 1313. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding effect content column, and a random number distribution column for determining a variation pattern. The variation pattern type column stores information for specifying the type for identifying the variation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information that identifies the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information that identifies the effect content to be executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for determining the variation pattern stores the distribution in which the corresponding variation pattern is selected for each setting. The distribution random number column for determining the variation pattern of the variation pattern table (that is, the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A) and FIG. 145 (A) described later) selected when the special lottery result is out of order is displayed when reach occurs. And for each of the times when reach does not occur, the distribution in which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[11-4. Setting suggestion effect executed after the temporary display of the special lottery result]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A) will be described. First, the effects performed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 141.

FIG. 141 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects performed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). In the fluctuation of the deviation variation pattern 20, after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the SP reach 1 is executed, the special lottery result is subsequently out of order. A definite display indicating that there is is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the variation of the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be deviation is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the SP reach 1 is executed, and then the setting is made. The suggestion effect is executed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this way, even if the temporary display is executed by executing the setting suggestion effect after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order is performed in the fluctuation patterns 25 to 29. The player can expect the subsequent setting suggestion effect to occur and maintain a sense of expectation. Further, when the setting suggestion effect occurs due to the deviation fluctuation, even if the special lottery result is out of order, the player's disappointment due to the result of the special lottery can be suppressed, and eventually the feeling of exhilaration can be enhanced.

In addition, in the fluctuation of the deviation variation pattern 24, after the SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be deviation is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the setting suggestion effect is executed. However, the setting suggestion effect itself is not performed, and a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The SP reach is a reach effect in which the rate of selection is high when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and the rate of selection is low when the result of the special lottery is out of order. That is, the expectation of a big hit of the fluctuation in which SP reach is executed is high.

Hereinafter, the effects performed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically described. In addition to the contents described below, in each effect, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and / or display on the effect display device 1600 are executed at the same time. May be good.

In the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29, first, the pre-reach effect is executed. In the pre-reach effect, all the decorative symbols are changed in the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24-29, the normal reach effect is developed. In the normal reach effect, the decorative symbol is in the reach state in the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, of the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a changing state.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24-29, the SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half effect of the SP reach 1 is executed. In SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a rock-paper-scissors game is played. In the first half of the SP reach 1 in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, the effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed in the effect display device 1600. In the SP reach, the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position closer to the periphery of the display device 1600, for example, as compared with the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24-29, the latter half of SP reach 1 is produced. In the latter half of the SP reach 1 in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called revival effect is executed, and for example, at the start of the second half effect, the voice of the main character such as "still more!" Is output from various speakers, and the effect is produced. On the display device 1600, the effect of playing a rock-paper-scissors game between the main character and the enemy character is executed again. In the latter half of the SP reach 1 in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29, the effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character again in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed in the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, a temporary display in which the special lottery result is out of order is executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one combination of decorative symbols in a detached state (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol are the same symbols as the symbols stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is the corresponding symbol. A symbol different from the same symbol) is displayed in a manner as if it is shaking with a small width.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation pattern 20, after the provisional display, a definite display indicating that the special lottery result was deviation is displayed on the effect display device 1600 without performing any other effect. In the deviation variation pattern 24, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is deviation is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the definite display, for example, in the effect display device 1600, the same combination as the combination of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped manner. In the temporary display and the final display, the decorative symbol is displayed, for example, in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 in the same size as in the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the setting suggestion Gase effect in the deviation variation pattern 24, for example, in the effect display device 1600, an effect in which one main character discovers two enemy characters and chases the enemy character but cannot catch them is executed. As in the distribution of the deviation pattern 24 in FIG. 140 (A), it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the setting suggestion gassing effect is executed is equal or approximately uniform in all the settings. This is because if the distribution is not even, the setting suggestion effect suggests the setting.

Further, it is desirable that the ratio of the deviation pattern 24 distribution to the total distribution of the fluctuations in which the SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, the setting suggestion effect will be generated frequently when the SP reach 1 is developed, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect may be reduced.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one main character discovers two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy character, and then three people play a rock-paper-scissors game. The production is executed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25, in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people, the effect that all three people play goo and become sympathetic is executed. Further, in FIG. 140 (A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is defined so as to be distributed only in the low setting (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25 is an effect in which the low setting is confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 140 (A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 and the like in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is achieved. If it occurs, the player may stop the game at an early stage, so that the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of the other setting confirmation effect in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern 25 itself does not have to exist.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26, an effect is executed in which all three players play a choki in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players. Further, in FIG. 140 (A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is defined to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26 is an effect in which the high setting is confirmed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27, in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people, the effect that all three people put out a par and become a friend is executed. Further, in FIG. 140 (A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is defined to be sorted only in even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27 is an effect in which the even number setting is confirmed.

In the setting suggestion production in the deviation fluctuation pattern 28, a production in which all three players make different hands in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players is executed. Further, in FIG. 140 (A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is defined to be distributed only in odd-numbered settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28 is an effect in which the odd number setting is confirmed.

For example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, the player can be interested in the effect by installing the odd number setting confirmation effect or the even number setting confirmation effect as described above. ..

Specifically, for example, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is high in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1 (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), and settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, Probability change jackpot ratio is higher in the order of 2 (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are set in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and the probability variation ratio in each setting are set so that the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out to the number of prizes won in the game balls is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

In this case, the even number setting has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the normal state than the odd number setting, but the probability variation rate is low, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be smaller. The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in one consecutive villa from the first hit tends to be small. On the other hand, the odd number setting has a lower probability of winning a big hit in the normal state than the even number setting, but the probability variation rate is high, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first hit tends to be larger, but the first hit The total amount of game balls that can be obtained from one consecutive villa is likely to increase. In such a case, there is a possibility that one player prefers an even-numbered ball ejection tendency and another player prefers an odd-numbered ball ejection tendency. Therefore, an odd-numbered setting confirmation effect or an even-numbered setting confirmation effect may occur. The player's interest in the production will increase. Further, the even-numbered setting may have a feature that the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is higher than that of the odd-numbered setting, but the jackpot with a small number of rounds is easily selected.

In the above-mentioned deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the effect until the setting suggestion effect starts is the same, but the content of the setting suggestion effect is different (the result in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people is different). In addition, it is desirable that the rock-paper-scissors game production by three people is used only in the out-of-range fluctuation patterns 25 to 29. As a result, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion production has started when the rock-paper-scissors game production by three people starts, and the feeling of exhilaration is further enhanced.

It should be noted that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect of determining the high setting is executed, but may be a variation pattern in which an effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting is high is executed. Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern 25 is distributed even at a low setting and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the variation pattern 25 at the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the effect of the deviation variation pattern 25 is achieved. Is not a production that confirms the high setting, but a production that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting.

In addition to the variation pattern in which the effect of determining the high setting is executed, the variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting is high as described above is executed may be defined. The same applies to the low setting confirmation effect, the odd number setting confirmation effect, the even number setting confirmation effect, the maximum setting confirmation effect, and the like.

According to the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 140 (B) (the fluctuation pattern table at the time of normal and big hit winning), when the special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern 34 other than the hit fluctuation pattern 34 in which the maximum setting is fixed is determined. The setting suggestion effect of is not executed. In addition, the distribution of fluctuation patterns in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than in the case where the special lottery result is out of order. As a result, the setting suggestion effect is mainly executed when the special lottery result is out of order, and the player can obtain a sense of expectation even when the special lottery result is out of order.

[11-5. Setting suggestion effect using shortened fluctuation]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A).

Shortening variation is performed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30. The shortened variation is, for example, a variation in which the variation time is shorter than that of other variation patterns, and after the variation of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600, all the decorative symbols do not develop into a reach state. Is a fluctuation that stops. In the normal variation, in the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may be stopped at the same time.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display is performed to indicate that the special lottery result is out of order. The description of the provisional display and the final display is the same as the above description, and is therefore omitted.

The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time different from the variation time of all other variation patterns in which the shortened variation such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 is executed. In the example of FIG. 140 (A), the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. .. Further, in FIG. 140 (A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is defined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

Further, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 30, which is a variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed and suggests the setting, is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other variation patterns in which the shortening variation is executed (for example, the other variation pattern). It is desirable that it is 10% or less of the minimum distribution of. Further, it is desirable that the execution time of the provisional display and the confirmed display is the same in each fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed, and only the time of the shortened fluctuation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which other shortened fluctuations are executed is such that the player can recognize (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). ..

As a result, when the shortened variation is executed, the player assumes a variation time such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 with many distributions, but when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the expected variation time is used. You can recognize that they are different, and you can enjoy the production where the highest setting is fixed. In particular, in the example of FIG. 140 (A), since the fluctuation pattern including the shortening fluctuation is selected only when the shortening fluctuation is out of reach, the player loses the expectation that the shortening fluctuation is executed and is interested in the shortening fluctuation. I can't have it. However, by executing the setting suggestion effect using the shortened variation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortened variation that is selected only when the player is out of reach, and suppresses the decline in interest. can do.

Further, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the contents displayed on the effect display device 1600 are the same, but only the time of the shortened variation is different. As a result, the player can concentrate on the production so as not to overlook the highest setting final production.

The deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the maximum setting is fixed and the shortened variation is executed. However, for each setting other than the maximum setting, the setting is fixed and the shortened variation is executed. A pattern may exist. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the fluctuation time of each of the fluctuation patterns is different from the fluctuation time of other deviation fluctuation patterns in which the shortened fluctuation is executed.

[11-6. Setting suggestion effect executed before the temporary display of the special lottery result]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). In FIG. 140, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are defined to be sorted only at the maximum setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, that is, an effect in which the maximum setting is fixed.

In the deviation variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out is performed. In the hit variation pattern 34, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

The deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are different from the deviation variation patterns 25 to 30 and the like, and the setting suggestion effect is started before the provisional display (specifically, at the same time as the start of the variation). As a result, the player can get an uplifting feeling waiting for the notification of the big hit lottery result in the state where the maximum setting is confirmed. Further, especially when the display time of the special movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and by extension, the player. Can feel superiority to the other player, and it becomes easier for the hall to appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[11-7. Setting suggestion production where big hit winning or high setting is confirmed]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). In FIG. 140 (A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is defined so as to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 32 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34.

In the deviation variation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is performed. In the hit variation pattern 35, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, one of the high setting and the big hit in the fluctuation is determined. That is, if the special lottery result is out of order after the special movie 2 is generated, the high setting is confirmed, so that the player can suppress the disappointment that the special lottery result is out of order, and by extension, the high setting. A feeling of exhilaration can be obtained by confirming.

Further, especially when the display time of the special movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel superiority to other players, and after the special movie 2 is generated. If the special lottery result is out of order, it will be easier for the hall to appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[11-8. Setting suggestion effect in a time-saving state]
Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern selected in the game state and the time saving state will be described. FIG. 145 (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the reduced working hours state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 145 (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

In the example of FIG. 145 (A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 2 at the time of non-reach deviation. Further, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time, and per unit time. The number of game balls to be paid out will increase, which may lead to a burden on the hall.

However, as in the example of FIG. 145 (A), the higher the setting, the more the distribution of the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, so that the number of game balls paid out by the big hit per unit time in each setting can be made equal. can. Further, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the deviation pattern 3 having a long fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns including the shortened fluctuation. Therefore, the deviation fluctuation pattern 3 also functions as a fluctuation pattern suggesting a high setting. Can be done.

Similarly, even when there is a reach, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 11 having a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 12 having a short fluctuation time. Similarly, at the time of winning the big hit, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 2 having a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 3 having a short fluctuation time.

As described above, for example, when the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all the settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time. In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the jackpot, and the number of game balls to be fired before winning the jackpot increases. For example, if the lower the setting, the larger the distribution of fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times, and the smaller the selection rate of fluctuation patterns with short fluctuation times, the player who stops firing the game ball during fluctuations, respectively. It is possible to equalize the number of game balls fired per unit time in the setting.

It should be noted that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing when the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. The predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be dedicated to be executed only at the time of setting suggestion effect. Further, particularly in the setting suggestion effect in which the high setting or the maximum setting is fixed, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect output or a predetermined light emission effect, which is executed only by the setting suggestion effect, is executed.

It is desirable that the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the high setting or the maximum setting is fixed or the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other fluctuation patterns. If the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the player loses the sense of expectation and eventually plays the game early if the high setting suggestion effect and the highest setting suggestion effect are not executed even though the player plays only a short game time. This is because there is a risk of canceling.

Further, it is desirable that the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the low setting or the minimum setting is fixed or the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other fluctuation patterns. This is because if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the low setting suggestion effect and the minimum setting suggestion effect are frequently executed, which may cause the player to lose the sense of expectation and eventually stop the game at an early stage.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect suggesting a group of settings such as high setting, low setting, maximum setting, odd number setting, and even number setting has been described, the setting group in the setting suggestion effect is not limited to these. A setting suggestion effect for any group consisting of one or more settings may be executed. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be set as low settings, settings 3 and 4 may be set as intermediate settings, and settings 5 and 6 may be set as high settings, or there may be a group consisting of only settings 5.

[11-9. Other forms of pachinko machines with setting functions]
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974. , The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

FIG. 146 (A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the base display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 146 (B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In the example shown in FIG. 146 (B), in addition to the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit (not shown), the base display 1317, the base display switch 1318, and the RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310. .. The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954, setting key 971) that trigger RAM clear are provided in the main control board box 1320. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 from which data is erased is different between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be directly connected between the boards by a connector or may be connected by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. The setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and the setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

The outputs of the various switches 971, 972, and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the port of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Since the main control board box 1320 is arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position that can be seen from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each manufacturer of the pachinko machine is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads out and collates the authentication code set on the setting board 970. Then, if the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 cannot start the game. That is, although the game ball can be launched toward the game area, the prize ball is not paid out even if the prize is won in the winning opening, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine model, or the serial number for each pachinko machine may be set. As a method of setting the authentication code, for example, the authentication code is set by a DIP switch, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, a short circuit of a pattern, etc. provided on the setting board 970, or a logic circuit in which the authentication code is set (for example,). A small-capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Further, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, by outputting a signal different from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1320 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs + 5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). The signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to a specific port of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1320. The main control MPU 1320 determines the connected board by the input signal to the port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model), it is possible to prevent the wrong setting board 970 from being mounted on the main control board box 1320. Further, by setting the authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, it is possible to prevent unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970.

FIG. 146 (C) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A).

As described above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a game performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine regarding the prize ball acquired by the player, such as the jackpot probability in the special symbol variation display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 according to the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, conventional pachinko machines that do not have a setting function are sufficient, and there are some halls where the setting function is unnecessary. For this reason, manufacturers of pachinko machines need to design and produce both pachinko machines that do not have a setting function and pachinko machines that have a setting function. Efficient design and production of pachinko machines are required.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 having no setting function, the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same manner as when the setting board 970 is mounted. To. Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared between the pachinko machine having no setting function and the pachinko machine having the setting function.

The dummy board 979 does not have devices such as the setting key 971 and the setting display 974 mounted on the setting board 970, but may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, a pattern for mounting the device is provided on the dummy board 979, but the device is not mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 may be a member (for example, a unit made of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970, even if it is not composed of the printed circuit board.

Further, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is neither open nor ground on the dummy board 979, but is terminated by a dummy resistor. It is good. This can prevent damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. Further, when the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 971A. A small door that can be moved so as to close the hole 971A is provided in the main control board box 1320 so that it can be operated from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and cannot be operated from the outside, thereby providing a setting function. The main control board box 1320 may be shared with a pachinko machine that does not have a pachinko machine and a pachinko machine that has a setting function.

The dummy board 979, which will be described later, may also be set with an authentication code for the main control board 1310 to authenticate. Further, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310, and it is not necessary to set an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above can be summarized as follows.

(1) There is a setting change switch 974, and there is a setting confirmation switch 973. In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 974 to select the setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(2) With setting change switch 974, without setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted in the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 974 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without setting change switch 974, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted in the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select a setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

(4) No setting change switch 974, no setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the set value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

147 and 148 are views showing another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the mounting example shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, the small door 1321 is provided in the main control board box 1320, which is different from the mounting example shown in FIG. 146.

FIG. 147 (A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. As described above, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the base display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode. A hole 976A for operating the 976 is provided.

The hole 976A is normally covered by a small door 1321. The small door 1321 is provided with a key unit 1321. By inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating the small door 1321, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed and set. The mode switch 976 can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 148 (A), in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the door 1323 is in the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, the door 1323 is inserted into the seat 1324, and the door 1323 and the seat 1324 are inserted. Engage with and the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and the rotation operation is performed, the hinge 1323 retracts from the maximum protruding position, and the engagement between the hinge 1323 and the seat 1324 is released. The small door 1321 can be opened around the hinge 1325. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 148 (B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing still another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 149, the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980 that covers the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the back cover 980 is opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It will be possible.

That is, in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and the rotation operation is performed, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back side. The setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 147 (C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the base display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode. A hole 976A is provided for operating the. The main control board box 1320 houses the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. In addition to the main control MPU and driver circuit (not shown), the base display 1317, the base display switch 1318, and the RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310. The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be directly connected between the boards by a connector or may be connected by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. The setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and the setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[11-10. Details of setting change processing]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 150 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (steps S17 and S30). The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 101 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes an initialization process by executing a main control program. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determination (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (step S18).

The RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result may be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value may be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 is not operated, it is a normal RAM clear operation, so the process proceeds to step S30 to initialize a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the mode shifts to the setting mode. That is, since it is necessary to operate the two switches and the power switch to start the setting mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of starting the setting mode by mistake.

In the setting mode, first, the set value is displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current set value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974. Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare to put the pachinko machine 1 in the setting mode during the game, and there is a possibility of fraudulent activity. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the mode is changed to the setting mode during business hours.

The security signal may be output for a predetermined time from the start of the setting mode, output between the start and end of the setting mode, or output from the start of the setting mode to the predetermined period after the end of the setting mode. good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the setting mode, the period during which the abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation has been performed depending on whether or not the setting change switch 972 is operated (step S62), changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes the setting value to the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is composed of a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the setting value is changed by one step. Further, when the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned to the right once, the setting value is changed by one step. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed set value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

After that, it is determined whether to end the setting mode and confirm the set value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting mode is terminated and the process proceeds to step S30. Further, the setting mode may be terminated by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. Further, the setting mode may be terminated by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

In the above-mentioned process, after the setting mode ends, or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but the process may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting mode ends, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), it is determined whether the checksums match (step S22), the power failure flag is not set, and the checksum is checked. If they do not match, the predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

After the setting mode ends, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and the gaming state (for example, probability change state, time reduction). The data of the state, the reserved memory of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol, the information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24. The game state data may be deleted without leaving it. In this case, the storage area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation and the storage area erased by the RAM clear operation are the same.

On the other hand, if the operation for ending the setting mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62, and further, the setting change operation is detected.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected in step S17, the set value data and the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are found in step S30. ), The other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312, and determines whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). ..

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 erases the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128). (Step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and checks calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff. The thumb and the checksum stored in step S48 are compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 backs up to the work area. The data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased in step S24. Proceed to.

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the main control MPU 1311 deletes the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag abnormality (step S20) that is not set, a RAM abnormality (step S22) in which the checksums of the RAMs do not match, and an abnormality (step S24) of the work for base calculation. Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area). (For example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the hold storage of the special symbol or the normal symbol, the information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or if the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack). (Including the area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

In the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 are different from those shown in the figure. You may clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for base calculation for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data)). Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear switch is operated, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIGS. 22 and 102 is the presence / absence of a process (steps S50, S52) in which a check code is calculated and stored from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, but is executed by the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process described later (FIGS. 151 and 152), but the setting confirmation process is performed in the initialization process. You may do it. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, the setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the set value due to an inadvertent operation during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

In this case, a setting confirmation operation unit (for example, a push button switch) is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the setting confirmation operation unit), and when the power is turned on. When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312, data for displaying on the setting display 974 is generated, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 974. It is good to do it. In this case as well, it is advisable to output a security signal along with the display of the set value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear process even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process, and executes the RAM clearing process after the predetermined condition is satisfied (the end of the setting mode). It can be said that during the setting mode, the main control MPU 1311 is controlled to memorize the execution of the RAM clear process. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

After the setting mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may be cleared at the same time. Further, it is not necessary to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952. Further, it may be switched whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit by the operation. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the RAMs of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952 are cleared, and the setting key 971 is turned on. If the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. By changing the operation method in this way, it is possible to clear a part of the area of the main control RAM 1312 and execute the process in which the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared.

Further, when clearing the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952, there is a difference between the timing of clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the timing of clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. May occur. That is, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the payout control unit 952 clears the RAM immediately. Therefore, depending on the condition (operation), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

Further, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, but also on the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 while operating the RAM clear switch 954 when changing the set value. When the power is turned on, the RAM of the payout control unit 952 should be cleared. That is, the payout control unit 952 does not clear the RAM by the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, but the payout control unit 952 detects the level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. It is determined whether or not the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared. If the RAM clear switch is provided on the payout control board 951, there is an effect that various models can be supported without changing the control program on the frame side.

[11-11. Details of setting confirmation process]
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

Compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. 23, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 151 is provided with a base calculation process (step S801) instead of the accessory ratio calculation area update process in step S81, and serves as step S89. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. Further, a setting confirmation process (S802) for displaying a set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operation ratio of the condition device) is added. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 23 and 104 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74), a timer update process (step S76), a random number update process 1 (step S78), and a prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103) is updated to calculate the base value (see step S801, FIG. 105 and FIG. 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it may be executed in an early order in order to reliably execute each timer interrupt. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). Step S88) is executed.

After that, the setting confirmation process (S802) for displaying the set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, the employee of the hall performs a predetermined operation to display the current setting value on the setting display 974. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 152.

Subsequently, the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 151).

In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting confirmation operation is in progress (S8021). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a transition to the setting mode (step S17 in FIG. 150), and if it is operated during operation, it becomes a setting confirmation operation and can display the current setting.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, so data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (S8025).

On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (S8022).

As a setting display condition, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 by the output of the frame opening switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is open. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected even though the outer frame 2 is closed, it is presumed that some abnormality (malfunction or fraudulent activity) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and in this case, the setting is made. It is better not to display. Further, since the setting display 974 is installed on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the setting.

The set value may be displayed at any time during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. Further, a setting display condition that enables display at a specific time may be provided. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) from the time when the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer for measuring the elapsed time from turning on the power (or the initial setting of the CPU in step S28) so that the set value can be displayed until the timer is timed up.

Further, a setting display condition may be provided so that the set value can be displayed in a specific gaming state. For example, the setting display condition cannot be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game. That is, a setting display condition is provided so that the set value can be displayed during a period other than during the special symbol change and the jackpot. In addition, the set value may not be displayed in a game state other than the above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game, the set value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the setting display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8023). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to confirm the setting during the game, which is a precursor to fraudulent activity. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours.

The security signal can be output for a predetermined time from the start of the set value display, output between the start and end of the set value display, or output from the start of the set value display to the predetermined period after the end of the set value display. good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the set value display is completed, the period during which the abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, a security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied, but even if the setting display condition is not satisfied, a security signal is transmitted when the setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected. good.

After that, the set value is displayed (step S8024). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current set value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974.

If the setting display condition is not satisfied, the condition is checked until the setting display condition is satisfied, but it may not be possible to get out of the loop for a long time. The confirmation process may be completed. For example, if it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is in progress, and then the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display ends. And display the set value. If the setting conditions are not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be terminated immediately without repeating the confirmation of the setting conditions.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, the new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and the new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so that the set value can be confirmed without interfering with other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used in combination, the set value is displayed with priority during the setting confirmation, so that the base value is calculated but the base value is not displayed. In a gaming state where many prize balls are paid out in a short period of time, it may be desirable to check the change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without interfering with the real-time display of the base value.

[11-12. Output of security signal for setting change and setting confirmation]
FIG. 153 is a timing diagram of a security signal output when a setting is changed or a setting is confirmed.

As described above, a security signal is output at the time of setting mode and setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 150, S8023 in FIG. 152).

In the setting mode, as shown in FIG. 153 (A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) at which the security signal is output may be longer than the time during which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of the setting mode but for a period from the start to the end of the setting mode.

Further, in the setting mode, as shown in FIG. 153B, a security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clearing process executed in association with the setting mode.

At the time of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 153C, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation. The predetermined time (T seconds) at which the security signal is output may be longer than the time during which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation but for a period from the start to the end of the setting confirmation (the period during which the setting value is displayed).

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, as shown in FIG. 153D, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) from the detection of the error. When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 153 (E), a security signal is output for a predetermined time from the detection of the error. That is, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation and the security signal caused by the error detection are continuously output over a predetermined time (T seconds) (a predetermined time from the error detection). Even if an error is detected during the setting confirmation, it is not necessary to extend the security signal output time. That is, even if an error is detected during the output of the security signal, the security signal due to the error detection is not output and is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error during the setting mode, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation and the security signal caused by the error detection do not overlap. That is, in the setting mode, the output time of the security signal is not extended even if an error occurs, but the output time of the security signal is extended if an error occurs at the time of setting confirmation.

[12. Slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of the program and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described. Next, the arrangement of the program and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (rotary type gaming machine) will be described. Although the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 26, the programs and data are arranged in the RAM and the ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[12-1. Construction]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 open.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, in the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing 4100 having an open front surface, and a front surface member is provided on the front surface of the housing 4100. The 4200 is provided so as to be openable and closable in a single-sided manner. On the upper part of the front member 4200, an image display body 4500 for displaying and displaying information according to the progress of the game, a speaker for producing sound, and the like are provided. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. The display of various effects and the display of history information on the image display body 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 serves as an effect display means capable of displaying the effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 provides a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant.

In the center of the front member 4200, a front panel is arranged so that the rear cannot be seen and a pattern for decoration is drawn, and the rear can be seen in the center of the front panel (for example, transparent). ) A design display window 4401 is formed. The front panel may be configured by a display device, and the reel 4301 can be visually recognized when the image is not displayed on the symbol display window 4401, and an image for producing a game is displayed mainly around the symbol display window 4401. do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for producing the game on the portion of the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), it is possible to visually recognize the symbol that is variablely displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 arranged in the housing. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. A strip-shaped sheet on which a plurality of symbols are drawn is wound around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, so that the plurality of symbols are arranged according to a predetermined arrangement.

Reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 156), which are stepping motors, are provided on the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are independently rotated and stopped. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c form a drive source for the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c are controlled by the two-phase excitation method in the same manner as the payout motor 839 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, thereby increasing the drive torque and the static torque. This makes it possible to use a small motor as the drive source and reduce costs.

In the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c will be referred to as the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are designated as the left reel stop button 4211a, the middle reel stop button 4211b, and the right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to each reel are the left reel drive motor 4341a, the middle reel drive motor 4341b, and the right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are changed so as to circulate from top to bottom (variation display). On the other hand, in the state where the reel 4301 is stopped, for each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a predetermined number of consecutive symbols (for example, three), that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, are transmitted through the symbol display window 4401. It is visible. That is, the effective display unit of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 4401.

A predetermined enableable line is set for the 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401. In the present embodiment, a line (middle line) that crosses the middle symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and a line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the left reel 4301a lower to the middle reel 4301b middle to the right reel 4301c upper. Right-up line), left reel 4301a upper-middle reel 4301b middle-right reel 4301c lower, a line (down-right line) that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is an enableable line. Then, the enableable line is activated by the player inserting a medal or inputting from a credit (hereinafter referred to as "bet operation"), and based on the symbol combination mode (roll) formed on this valid line. It is judged whether the prize (role) is established or not.

When a prize is established, there are cases where three predetermined symbols are lined up on the effective line, and there are also cases where three predetermined symbols are lined up on other lines in appearance. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) that crosses the upper symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that the line crossing the lower symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (lower line) and the front portion (visible part) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above. The symbols may appear to be lined up on the virtual line located. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle, rising to the right, falling to the right), the lines that can be visually aligned at the time of winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together to form a symbol stop line (design alignment). Line).

The upper, middle, lower, upward-sloping, and downward-sloping lines are set as enableable lines, and a predetermined enableable line is activated according to the number of bets, and a prize is won based on the symbol combination mode formed on this valid line. Judge the establishment / non-establishment of the role). For example, in the number of bets 1, the middle line is the effective line, in the number of bets 2, the upper and lower lines are the effective lines in addition to the middle line, and in the number of bets 3, the upper, middle and lower lines are added to the upper, middle and lower lines, and the upward and lower right lines are the effective lines. And. In addition, all lines may be valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), or may be dedicated to 3 cards.

Around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401, a payout number display LED 4562 that displays the number of medals paid out by the game is provided. A credit display for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of remaining games in the special prize may be provided.

Below the design display window 4401, a step portion that protrudes to the front side is formed, and the upper surface of this step portion is an operation portion 4202 that inclines downward toward the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a single insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation unit for advancing the game.

The medal slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game can be executed when the player inserts a medal into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performs a betting operation. A insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals is provided in the path through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information by the insertion sensor 4207b.

The single insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet insertion button 4205 can be input one by one from the credit by performing the pressing operation once. The max bet button 4206 can input from credits to the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) by performing a pressing operation once, but if the number of credits is less than the maximum number, the number of credits is input as the number of bets. It has become like.

Below the operation unit 4202, a refund button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. The refund button 4209 is paid out as a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, a medal (bet medal) input as a bet number by the single insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206, or a prize is established and stored as a credit. It is used when giving a command to return the medal (reservoir medal) to the medal tray 4201. In addition, when a medal is inserted from the medal slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay prize (replay prize), or a medal exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as a credit is also used for medals via the medal selector 4207. It will be returned to the saucer 4201.

The start lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a break game. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or when resetting the error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used when the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and packed inside the medal selector 4207 is returned to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 is composed of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively. The purpose is to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c according to the stop operation.

Further, below the portion where these operation buttons are provided, a decorative plate (decorative panel) constituting the lower region of the front member 4200 is provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the bottom of the front member 4200, a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout outlet, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 156) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is arranged in the upper part inside the housing. An accessory ratio display 1317 and an accessory ratio display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display (for example, payout number display LED4562 or image display 4500) provided in front of the slot machine 4000, and the payout number display LED4562 is used. Or the image display body 4500 may display the accessory ratio.

When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It is preferable to indicate (print, engraving, seal, etc.) that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board near the accessory ratio display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100. It is desirable that the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is provided in the vicinity of the accessory ratio display 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is in a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, an effect). It may be provided on the control board 4700, the power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. Further, as will be described later, the accessory ratio display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the accessory ratio display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

Further, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided substantially in the center of the inside of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are mounted. Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000.

Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is arranged at the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the effective line and a prize is established, the prize is won. The number of medals (payout medals) corresponding to the above, or the medals exceeding the credit upper limit due to the addition accompanying the winning of the prize are paid out to the medal tray 4201. The medals for the credits are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110 by operating the payout button 4209. Further, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, medals overflowing from the medal payout device 4110 and flowing in are stored, and the inflowing medals are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guiding.

[12-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 156 is a block diagram showing the configurations of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 4600 is equipped with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input / output interface 4604, and the like.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with a bonus ratio display 1317 for displaying the bonus ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and a bonus ratio display switch 1318 for switching the display of the bonus ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be a switch of another type. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

The above-mentioned single push button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop button 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, refund button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are not shown. Is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a When 4211b and 4211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c is output to the main board 4600.

Further, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main board 4600, and various signals are input to the main board 4600 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device 4300, the devices include a medal payout device 4110 and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right). Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is composed of a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c can independently rotate and stop, and at the time of rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed from above on the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed while continuously changing downward.

Further, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c have position sensors 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting the reference position regarding the rotation, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c have the position sensors 4331a, 4331b, 4331c, respectively. It is provided correspondingly in the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting the detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain the stop position information of each reel.

The solenoid 4207a and the input sensor 4207b described above are installed in the medal selector 4207. The insertion sensor 4207b detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, and outputs the medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted, and even if the player inserts the medal, the medal selector 4207 The medals that flowed through the return gutter return to the medal tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is invalidated, so that neither betting nor storage of medals is performed by inserting medals.

The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e for detecting the paid out medals one by one in the discharge port, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. .. Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full tank sensor 4111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal in which the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is transmitted to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display body 4500, the error lamp 4554, etc., and the player, the hall employee, or the like is notified that the abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, the drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. Further, a drive signal is input from the main board 4600 to the medal payout device 4110 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the effective line, and the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation in response to the input signal. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110, or if there are no medals at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, an error signal of the payout medal is output from the payout sensor 4110e to the main board 4600, and in response to this, the main board 4600 notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of the medal. Is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display body 4500, or the like to notify the player, the hall employee, or the like that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 includes an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600, and the effect control board 4700 includes CPU 4701, ROM 4702, RAM 4703, input / output interface 4707, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, sound source IC4706 and the like are mounted. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600 and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 4502 and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 in the amusement park via the external relay terminal board 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays a role of relaying various signals (input medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from an AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supply supplied from the island equipment. For example, three types of power supplies are created: DC + 5V (hereinafter, “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (hereinafter, “+ 12V”), and DC + 24V (hereinafter, “+ 24V”). The three types of power supplies created by the power supply device 4112, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, are supplied to each configuration included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies of + 5V and + 12V are the reel 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. It is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300 provided with the above.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is provided with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power supply switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000, and can be operated only by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. Further, the reset switch 4112u is for canceling an error generated in the slot machine 4000, and is further operated when changing the setting together with the setting change key switch 4112t.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When the drive torque for rotating the reel 4301 is obtained by rotationally driving the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting to, + 12V is controlled to be supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as the motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining a quiescent torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is stopped, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting to, + 5V as a motor drive voltage is controlled to be supplied to the reel drive motor 4341.

The above is a configuration example of the slot machine 4000. In the game using the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 while the number of medals to be multiplied is determined, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are rotated, and then the player has the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped and controlled, and all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the effective line, and it is necessary. A specified number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination will be awarded accordingly.

As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a reel band on which a design is drawn. Then, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed from the display content (combination mode of the symbols displayed on the valid line) displayed in the symbol display window 4401 when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line in the symbol display window 4401. It is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in each of the plurality of effective lines. As a result, when it is determined that a combination of symbols of a plurality of winning combinations is displayed, a total number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each displayed winning combination is paid out.

[12-3. Storage area configuration]
Subsequently, the storage area provided by the ROM 4602, the RAM 4603, and the like provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Although the storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 24, it has the same configuration as that of the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 157 to 160. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing details of an access area in game control of the slot machine 4000 in the present embodiment and a ROM area 5100 which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602.

The storage area in the present embodiment is provided by a medium such as ROM4602 and RAM4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH" are assigned. Further, the access area of the present embodiment is divided into a predetermined area corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I / O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. It has been. It should be noted that each area does not necessarily correspond to the medium that provides the access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

When the access area of the present embodiment is configured as described above, the CPU 4601 can access the program or data by designating the address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. The details of the access area will be described below.

[12-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be described. The ROM area 5100 corresponds to the storage area provided by ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium in which the stored contents are retained even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read out, but can be updated or deleted. You can't do that. The ROM 4602 may be any non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updatable.

The ROM area 5100 is assigned an address from "0000H" to "1FFFH". The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the ROM 4602 by designating "1FFFH" from the address "0000H".

The ROM area 5100 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The first control area is a game control area, and a program for performing game control and the like are stored. Further, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the program stored in the first control area is executed, and the game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. The area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

The second control area stores a program for debugging (functional inspection) the control program. The second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (functional inspection). The second data area is not always necessary, and debugging data may be stored in the second control area. The area (second control area, second data area) in which the program and data for debugging the game control program (functional inspection) without being used for game control are stored is the debugging (inspection function) area (inspection function). Second storage area).

In the third control area, a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio is stored. Data for calculating the accessory ratio is also stored in the third control area. A third data area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio may be provided. An area (third control area) in which a program or data for calculating the accessory ratio without being used for game control is stored is used as a bonus ratio calculation area (third storage area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 Can be performed separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the labor of inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The first quarantine area, the second quarantine area, the third quarantine area, and the fourth quarantine area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas for which access is prohibited. In the process by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset process is forcibly executed. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are continuous areas with the preceding and following areas. For example, the start address of the first isolated area is next to the end address of the first control area. ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first isolated area is the address immediately before the first data area ("0AFFH"). Further, the third isolated area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (functional inspection) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the debug (functional inspection) area. It may be treated as. Similarly, the fourth isolation area is arranged between the debugging (functional inspection) area and the accessory ratio calculation area, and is treated as a debugging (functional inspection) area in FIG. 157. It may be treated as an area for calculating the object ratio.

[12-3-2. RAM area]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in this embodiment. The RAM area 5200 corresponds to the storage area provided by the RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium in which the stored contents are erased when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores the program and data stored in the ROM area 5100, and stores the data derived by executing the program. The RAM 4603 may be a non-volatile storage medium as long as the data can be read and written. Further, in the event of a power failure, the data stored in the RAM 4603 by the backup power supply can be retained for a predetermined period.

The RAM area 5200 is assigned an address from "3000H" to "31FFH". The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the RAM 4603 by designating the addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 5200 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolated area. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when the game control (first control) is executed. The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing the debug control (second control) of the program. The work area for calculating the bonus ratio is an area for storing data for calculating the bonus ratio and the calculated bonus ratio (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio, advantageous section bonus ratio, etc.). The work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio do not necessarily have to secure a dedicated work area, and the work area for game control may be used, or the work area for game control may be used. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence between the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area is reduced. However, if the program configuration is such that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio are not used, the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio are not necessarily used. May be good.

The evacuation area is an area for temporarily storing data used in game control, debug (inspection function) control, or bonus ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various CPU registers (arithmetic register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) are copied to the save area before the predetermined process is executed. The value copied after the processing is completed is returned to various registers of the CPU. The evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and bonus ratio calculation, but as in the work area, game control, debugging (inspection function), and bonus ratio. It may be divided individually by calculation. As a result, it is possible to maintain more independence in game control, debug (inspection function) control, and bonus ratio calculation.

The isolated area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, the work area for debugging (inspection function), the evacuation area, and the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is assigned between and is a continuous area with each area (the area before and after). For example, the start address of the isolated area between the work area for game control and the work area for debugging (inspection function) is the address (“3076H”) next to the end address of the work area for game control, and the end address is This is the address ("307FH") immediately before the work area for debugging (inspection function). Further, the isolated area is an area where access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute the reset process when accessed in the process by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 158 shows the details of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio on the right side thereof. The work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. .. The backup area may be one or more. A check code for detecting an error in data is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, or is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 161). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, even if the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or the data is deleted and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 161). good. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code in each area is a correct value (that is, the data in each area is normal).

In the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 161), it is determined whether or not the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. Further, in the power off processing executed when the power is cut off, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area.

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio.

FIG. 159 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest way. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 159 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section Store the percentage. The number of bonuses paid out is the number of medals paid out while the bonus is in operation (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive bonus balls is the number of medals paid out during the continuous bonus operation (for example, during the big bonus). The total payout number is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of bonuses paid out by the total number of payouts. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of continuous bonus payouts by the total number of catch payouts. The number of advantageous section games is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the medals on hand such as ART (assist replay time) are difficult to decrease), and the number of non-advantageous section games is , The number of games played in a game state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of advantageous section games by (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non-advantageous section games).

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 159 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are the total of FIG. 159 (B) described later. It corresponds to the cumulative total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949627295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

The number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated in the bonus ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. , The continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 162).

FIG. 159 (B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 159 (B), the number of replays, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the number of games, the bonuses ratio, the continuous bonuses ratio, the number of advantageous section games, and non-playing Advantageous section The number of games and the ratio of advantageous sections are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games) for each predetermined number of games, and the number of executed games is predetermined. When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointer of all the data moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data moves for each predetermined number of prize balls. Also, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to a storage area one lagging behind the write pointer. This is to calculate the bonus ratio using the data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer makes a round. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 159 (B), the number of replays, the number of winning payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of continuous bonus payouts, and the number of games in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each. Numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. The total number of replays, the number of winnings paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the number of games are stored in a 3-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 can be stored in decimal. Since the cumulative total is, for example, the total of data for 400 games × n (6000 games when n = 15), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of replays, winning payouts, bonus payouts, continuous bonus payouts, and game counts is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949627295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the cumulative total and the cumulative total of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are storage areas of 3 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data (for example, 600 games) Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same data for 6000 games can be stored in total. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 159 (B), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio are It is the same as the explanation in FIG. 159 (A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The winning payout number is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games is the number of games executed, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of re-games, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are the area update processing for calculating the bonus ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 161). ), The bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 162).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 159 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio is deleted by the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 161). However, the data is not erased by other triggers. Therefore, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, 1 day, 1 week, January, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 159 (B) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

In addition, the data of the work area for calculating the bonus ratio and the calculated bonus ratio are abnormal values (for example, the bonus ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the bonus ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , Number of bonuses paid out> Total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. Further, when the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the value is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[12-3-3. I / O area configuration]
Subsequently, the I / O region 5300 will be described. Input / output ports correspond to the I / O area 5300, and each input / output port can be accessed by the CPU 4601 accessing the I / O area 5300. The input / output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to an input such as a switch, a port related to an output such as a grand prize opening solenoid and an LED drive signal. The input / output port settings (settings related to use / non-use of input settings, output settings, etc.) are set based on the set values of the parameter information setting area 5400.

[12-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Subsequently, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be described. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 5400 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, as shown in FIG. 160, various settings include start / end addresses of each control area and data area. Although the definition of the start address and the end address of each area of the third control area, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, and the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio is omitted in FIG. 160, the third control area start setting is omitted. And the third control area end setting is defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for calculating the accessory ratio and the work area end setting for calculating the accessory ratio are the start and end settings of other work areas. It is defined in the same way as the end setting, and the save area start setting for calculating the bonus ratio and the save area end setting for calculating the bonus ratio are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other save areas. Areas other than the area set here are regarded as unused (unset) areas. As a result, when the CPU4601 accesses the unused area, the reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU4601. Although it is set in a continuous area in FIG. 160, it does not have to be continuous as a setting area. For example, the parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, in the present embodiment, when an area other than the set area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100 and the isolated area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial startup of the program by causing a reset by intentionally accessing the isolated area. Since the slot machine executes the processing sequentially, it is possible to execute the program from the startup processing and execute the initial setting again by accessing the isolated area after the final game processing is completed. As a result, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, the normal value can be reset by executing the initial setting again. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clear is determined by the power cut flag, but it is possible to forcibly generate RAM clear by accessing the isolated area without setting the power cut flag. Become. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, the game is played in parallel, so if the game itself is initialized, the game cannot be continued, but in the case of the slot machine, it is no longer necessary after the game is over. Since it is necessary to initialize the RAM information, it is possible to eliminate the process for initializing the RAM information by accessing the isolated area.

The value set in the parameter information setting area 5400 is not sequentially set by the user program processing such as the initial setting of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address and the setting value of the parameter area in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. Before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at startup, the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU. As a result, various parameters can be set when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. Since the set values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[12-4. Game control]
[12-4-1. System reset boot process]
Subsequently, the control of the slot machine of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset start processing executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset start process is a process executed when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, a power failure occurs, or the like, and is a process of starting when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area assigned to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated to the RAM area 5200 as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 158) is used as an unused area. Assigned. Further, the work area and the evacuation area are divided into a game control area and a debugging (inspection function) use (or other use), respectively. Further, in the ROM area 5100, as in the RAM area 5200, an area for storing programs and data is allocated as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area is allocated as an unused area.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes the security check process (step S1012). The security check process is a process of determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, the ROM 4602 may have been replaced with an invalid ROM, so that the start of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check elapses (step S1014).

The process from turning on the power of the slot machine to the end of the security check (process up to step S1014) is not a process defined by the user program, but a process composed of hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a device initialization setting process for initializing (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, a process such as a start setting of a periodic process (FIG. 162, timer interrupt process) that periodically executes a predetermined process is executed. In this embodiment, a function such as a random number function setting that prevents the game lottery setting from being rewritten by a user program after a security check is executed by a parameter setting process, and other than these functions, a device initialization setting process is executed. Is running on. By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into a parameter setting process and a device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud is less likely to occur in the game.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to execute the initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 or a hot start for returning to the game with the contents of the backed up RAM 4603.

When the CPU 4601 performs a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes an initialization process for executing the initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when the setting of the gaming machine 1 is changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power cut flag is not set.

On the other hand, when the CPU 4601 performs a hot start to return to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "No"), the CPU 4601 executes a process of returning the game based on the contents of the backed up RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return process returns to the process interrupted at the time of power failure. Specifically, any of the processes from step S1024 to step S1042 of the system reset activation process described later or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 162) returns to the process interrupted at the time of power failure.

In the slot machine 4000 in the present embodiment, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when the recovery process is executed. At this time, only the game control work area excluding the debug (inspection function) work area out of all the areas where the checksum calculation target is used as the work (game control work area and debug (inspection function) work area). May be. The checksum is calculated only in the game control work area because the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process and affects the result of the game. Since it is a non-processing, it is possible that some bugs will remain due to insufficient verification. In this case, a work area for debugging (inspection function) that holds the information obtained by executing such processing is used. Targeting the checksum calculation target may impair the reliability of returning to normal from a power failure. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in the product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big trouble in the market. In some cases, it is possible that sales will be discontinued and it will be necessary to collect the product. In this case, it is extremely likely that it will cause enormous cost damage to the manufacturer and the hall. This is because the game control work area is more reliable than the debug (inspection function) work area because the verification is performed.

When the initialization process is completed or a series of games is completed, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process in order to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning the information of the RAM 4603 that is no longer needed for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

When the game initial setting process is completed, the CPU 4601 executes the information signal 1 output process for outputting the debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output process, processing such as setting the debug (inspection function) signal to the initial state is performed. Information signal output processing is defined as information signal 1 to N output processing, and a required module is called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when the debug (inspection function) signal (information about the start of rotation of the reel, ON of the start lever, and the winning combination) accompanying the start of the game is output in the process at the start of the game, the debug regarding the stop of each reel in the symbol stop process ( Inspection function) When a signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, a debug (inspection function) signal related to the fixed combination in the winning determination process (fixed combination displayed as stopped on each reel, payout associated with the fixed combination) At the time of output of information on the number of sheets, information on the output signal related to the number of payouts at the time of payout (number of payout medals, etc.), the "information signal N output process" module required for the process is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process for performing a process before the player operates the start lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the start lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not an instruction to execute a replay is given, whether or not a medal has been inserted, whether or not a medal has been cleared, and the like. The set value of the game is confirmed.

When the start lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes a game start process for starting the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is acquired, a winning combination or the like is determined, and the rotation of the reel 4301 is started. After that, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed (step S1032).

When the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 can accept the input of the reel stop button 4211, and executes a symbol stop process for processing until all the reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Further, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbol (step S1036). In the winning combination determination process, the winning combination is determined, and if it is determined that the winning combination is determined, the setting corresponding to the winning combination is made, and the setting for executing the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is made.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the work area for calculating the bonus ratio of the RAM area 5200 (FIG. 158, see FIG. 159) (step S1038). The process of step S1038 can be skipped when there is no prize medal to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Even if the slot machine 4000 detects an illegality and cancels the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. By executing these processes regardless of whether or not fraud is detected, it is possible to collect data for calculating the accessory ratio even during fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game end process for performing a game end process (step S1042). In the game end process, the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no winning or if there is no paying out, the processing is skipped. When the game end process is completed, the game returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[12-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, periodic processing, which is an interrupt processing that is activated at a predetermined cycle while the main loop processing of the system reset initial startup processing is being executed, will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure of periodic processing.

When the periodic processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the data to be saved is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. 158. As mentioned above, since the periodic processing is an interrupt processing that is started while the main loop processing is being executed, the processing can be continued after returning by saving the register of the CPU used in the main loop processing. Need to be.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer built in the CPU (step S1112). As a result, the watchdog timer can be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes a switch input process for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Further, the game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of a drive body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor, the detection of the origin position, and the like are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a timer measurement process for updating various timers used in the game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic processing x the set number of times.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, calls the accessory ratio calculation / display process to call the accessory ratio calculation work. The bonus ratio is calculated by referring to the number of medals paid out stored in the area. Then, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The bonus ratio calculation / display process is the same as the bonus ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the specific calculation method of the accessory ratio and the specific display method of the accessory ratio are the same as the methods described in the examples of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the bonus ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the bonus ratio, the bonus ratio (gambling of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

When the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but the bonus ratio display switch 1318 Only the displayed value may be calculated for each operation of. In addition, the bonus ratio is calculated regardless of whether the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 triggered by the operation of the bonus ratio display switch 1318. You may.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes an LED output process for controlling the LED (step S1120). The LED to be controlled is the one controlled by the main board 4600, and is, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. In addition, data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED is output.

The CPU 4601 executes an information output process for outputting a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal board 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes a random number update process for updating the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, the random number is updated to be generated by the software process. Here, in addition to the random numbers generated only by the software, the software random number built in the CPU is updated. With the soft random numbers built into the CPU, the count itself is executed by the hardware, but the trigger for updating is determined by this process. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the program processing related to the random number update.

When the random number update process is completed, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, the execution of the interrupt is permitted (step S1130). During periodic processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending, and after the timer interrupt processing executed immediately before is normally completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, it is configured so that periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed multiple times.

[12-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Subsequently, the information signal output process executed in the system reset start process and the like will be described. The information signal output process is provided according to each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is composed of a plurality of modules. For example, there are "for condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)" and "lottery determination process (signal output related to lottery)". Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the explanation of each flow is omitted. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the information signal output processing of the present embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all the registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure that the values are restored even if they are destroyed), and the values of all the registers are saved in the stack area. It is designed to let you. Further, the stack area used at this time is allocated to the evacuation area for debugging (inspection function), and is allocated to a different area separated from the evacuation area for game control.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires information to be referred from the RAM 4603 for selecting (ON / OFF) the information signal to be output (debugging (inspection function) signal) (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only the information stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, the data is not written to the RAM 4603 in the process, and when writing is required, the information is output to the debug (inspection function) work area. A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured not to be used (including reference) in processing other than information signal output processing. This makes it possible to ensure independence from other game control programs without using a common area even if the program that executes information signal output processing is placed in a different location from other game control programs. ..

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Further, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debug (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the transmission destination. After that, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output by the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed for the amount of the debug (inspection function) signal to be output. Output different types and numbers of signals for each output signal function (1 to N). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but the table in which the output signals corresponding to the functions are defined is defined in the area for debugging (inspection function). (Ii) The information signal output processing may be standardized by preparing a signal in the data area, selecting a signal corresponding to the function specified by the caller, and configuring the signal to be output.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the program (signal output program) for executing the information signal output processing and the like is stored in the area clearly separated from the area for storing the game control program (game control area). By providing an area (area for debugging (inspection function)), a program for debugging (inspection function) of the game machine 1 can be independently arranged. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the gaming machine 1, and is a process that does not affect the result of the gaming and does not impair the fairness of the gaming. Also, for other purposes (for example, to place a game control program or a general-purpose program to make up for the lack of capacity in the game control area), the program should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is statically called from the game control program and then executed, and at this time, the address of the called destination is specified. Further, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all the registers used in the game control area. Further, as described above, when the program processing of the game control area is executed, the access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the program processing of the debug (inspection function) area is executed. If so, it is configured to allow only reference to the game control work area and prohibit writing. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program placed in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the subroutine format, and after the subroutine is completed, it returns immediately after the call by the return instruction. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the signal output program (program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area) does not affect the execution of the game control program.

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for calculating the accessory ratio) may be the same as in steps S18 to S26 of FIG. 21 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. The slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the backup data in the game state is erased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the above-mentioned embodiment of the pachinko machine, it is possible to accurately calculate the role ratio of the slot machine in operation, and the gambling of the gaming machine in operation can be obtained. You can check it.

Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various changes and equivalents within the scope of the attached claims are made. It includes the composition.

Among the inventions disclosed in the present specification, the following are typical examples of the viewpoints of inventions other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control device that executes the program that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a bonus ratio display that displays information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device.
The main control device is
The data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display is transmitted to the driver circuit by serial communication, and the data is transmitted to the driver circuit.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises setting whether to use a synchronization method, a communication rate, a parity, or a stop bit for serial communication with the driver circuit after the power is turned on. Machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than the communication between the main control device and the peripheral control device.

As a result, it is possible to suppress an inaccurate display of the accessory ratio due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main control device is
It has a work RAM that holds data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the accessory ratio even when the power is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting for serial communication is executed after the work RAM is cleared.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the wrong accessory ratio by using the data of the RAM having the wrong content.

(3) The main control device is
It has a function to transmit the data stored in the FIFO buffer by serial communication.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a data storage amount for determining a timing for transmitting data from the FIFO buffer is set after the power is turned on.

As a result, data can be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with an arbitrary number of bits.

(4) A gaming machine that gives a gaming value to a player.
The main control device that executes the program that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a bonus ratio display that displays information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device.
The length of the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device, so that the main control device, the display device, and the driver are used. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit, it is easy to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging parts around the main controller, and the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. By making the signal line shorter than the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the accessory ratio can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are housed in one case.

This makes it easier to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging other parts around the main controller, and further reduces the effects of noise.

(6) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

This makes it easier to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging other components on the printed circuit board around the main controller, and further reduces the effects of noise.

(7) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by accommodating the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

This makes it possible to reduce the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. Further, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display direction of the accessory ratio display is the same direction as the display direction of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode for reducing power consumption without displaying characters and numbers on the display device.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio display is in a closed state in which the accessory ratio display cannot be visually recognized in the installed state of the gaming machine. Machine.

As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary power consumption of the gaming machine when it is not necessary to display the accessory ratio.

(11) A gaming machine that grants a prize ball as a game value to a player by winning a prize in a predetermined winning opening of the game ball launched toward the game area.
The main control device that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a bonus ratio display that displays information about prize balls,
The winning openings include a general winning opening in which the shape of the entrance does not change depending on the playing state, and an electric winning opening in which the entrance opens or expands depending on the playing state.
The main control device determines the number of prize balls paid out to the player, at least the number of first prize balls paid out in the wake of winning the general winning opening, and the winning of the electric winning opening. Count separately from the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio indicator displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main control device stores the counted number of prize balls in the memory, and stores the counted number of prize balls in the memory.
The memory stores a check code for verifying the number of stored prize balls, and stores the check code.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

As a result, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory, and it is possible to suppress the display of an erroneous bonus ratio (ratio of the number of first prize balls to the number of second prize balls).

(13) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off.
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area, and
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is stored in the second backup area, and the data is stored in the second backup area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, when at least one of the data for game control and the data for the number of prize balls for calculating the bonus ball ratio is normal, only the abnormal data can be deleted and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off.
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area, and
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is stored in the second backup area, and the data is stored in the second backup area.
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. The gaming machine described in the section.

If the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the bonus ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be erased at any time. For this reason, the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is prevented from being deleted by the operation of the staff at the game hall. , It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the ratio of accessories is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the gaming machine modified to a state where the accessory ratio is high, and it is possible to prevent concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is high.

(15A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information on a gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information regarding the game value is based on.
The control means is
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state is the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, the game discharged from the gaming machine). The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing by the number of balls, the sum of the number of gaming balls passing through the out opening and the number of winning balls).

(15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a prize detection signal for detecting a prize in the prize opening, a reception confirmation signal for a prize ball payout command, or a prize ball payout completion signal, or a prize ball. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base for displaying on the display means is updated at the timing when the prize ball payout command instructing the payout is transmitted.

(15D) The control means
It remembers the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When a signal for detecting the winning of a game ball is received to the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
The total number of prize balls is updated using the calculated number of prize balls.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means is
It remembers the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When the winning of a game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means is
It remembers the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When the winning of a game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Upon receiving the confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means,
The total number of prize balls is updated by using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction for receiving the reception confirmation.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means is
It remembers the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When the winning of a game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Upon receiving the completion of the payout of the prize ball according to the instruction from the payout control means,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction upon receiving the completion of the payout.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means has an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 15A to 15H, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(16A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information regarding a game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to a game situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information regarding the game value is based on.
The control means is
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player reaches a predetermined number in the normal gaming state.

(16C) The control means is
It remembers the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When the winning of a game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated and stored in the buffer.
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total prize balls are consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the game area). , The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing by (the sum of the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls).

(16D) The predetermined timing is the timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number.
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, whereby the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the predetermined number is moved to the number.

(16E) The control means has an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property within the constraint of the main control device according to the rules.

(17A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means is
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated in relation to the counted number of consumed balls satisfying a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means is
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information on the gaming value is calculated at the timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means is the number of balls consumed by the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of machines is counted.

(17D) The information regarding the game value is based on
The control means is
It stores the total number of out balls used to calculate the base,
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is calculated, stored in the buffer, and stored.
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number.
When the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out balls, thereby causing the total out balls from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a predetermined number is moved to a number.

(17F) The control means is
Taking the opportunity of winning a prize at the start winning opening, the special symbol variation display game for deriving the special game state is executed, and the game is executed.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when the hold storage of the special symbol variation display game is the upper limit value, the winning of the starting winning opening is not stored and the number of winning balls is counted.

(17G) The control means has an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property.

(18A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is provided with a main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is played can be detachably attached.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means displays information on the gaming value even when the main body frame is closed.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to the island equipment of the amusement park.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine that can be visually recognized when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the main body frame, and is attached to the main body frame.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is provided in the case of the control means so as to be visible from the back surface side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions of 18A to 18C, the decrease in the sales of the hall can be suppressed.

(19A)
It is a gaming machine that gives a gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means is
Information updating means for updating information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to satisfying a predetermined condition in the game, and
It has a game execution means to play a special symbol variation display game triggered by winning a prize at the start winning opening.
The preceding paragraphs are characterized in that the information regarding the game value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special symbol variation display game is being performed by the game execution means. The described gaming machine.

(19B) The information regarding the game value is based on.
As the predetermined condition, the control means said at any timing of detection of a prize to the winning opening, transmission of a prize ball payout command, reception of confirmation of receipt of the prize ball payout command, and reception of a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base for displaying on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions of 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which sufficient countermeasures against fraud are taken even in a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control means that executes the program that controls the progress of the game,
A production control means that controls the production of a special symbol variation display game that is performed when a prize is won at the start port, and
It is equipped with a game value information display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The effect control means is
By controlling the transition from the normal mode to the low power mode in which the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the gaming value information display means during the low power mode.

(20B) The effect of the special symbol variation display game is displayed, and the effect display means composed of a liquid crystal display means having a backlight is provided.
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value information display means is composed of a light emitting diode and does not reduce the brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) Provided with an effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game.
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time elapses after the hold storage of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted.
The game value information display means is characterized in that the display mode is not changed so as to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a full energy saving mode.

(21A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means is
It has a game state control means for controlling to one of a normal game state and a plurality of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
Described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information on the game value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Gaming machine.

(21B) The control means depends on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, and the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(21C) The control means is
When the special symbol variation display game becomes a big hit, the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state is derived, and the player is controlled to open the winning opening where a large amount of gaming value can be acquired.
The period from the determination of the jackpot by the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game is regarded as the advantageous gaming state, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information regarding the game value. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by.

(21D) The control means is
In the advantageous gaming state, the player is controlled to open the winning opening where a large amount of gaming value can be acquired.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of gaming balls won in the winning opening is excluded from the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, and the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

According to the inventions of 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that grants a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information about the given game ball.
In the game area where the launched game ball rolls, a starting port that is an opportunity to derive a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and an opportunity to derive an open state from the closed state of the starting port. At least there is a passageway that becomes
The control means is
It is also possible to control the special gaming state in which the open state of the starting port can be easily derived.
The number of prize balls given to the player is used as the number of prize balls given to the player, excluding the number of prize balls given and the number of balls consumed by the player when controlled by either the special gaming state or the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information about the gaming ball is calculated and updated by dividing by the number of balls consumed by the person.

(22B) The control means depends on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, and the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed in the normal state.

(22C) The control means sets the expanded state from the determination of the hit by the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game, and determines the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period with respect to the game ball. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by being excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means is characterized in that the number of game balls launched into the game area is excluded from the number of game balls winning in the starting port, and the number of balls consumed in the normal state is counted. The gaming machine described in each section.

According to the inventions of 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A launching device that can be operated by the player and launches a game ball toward the game area,
A prize ball granting means for granting a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected at the winning opening provided in the game area, and
When the game ball is detected in a predetermined winning opening among the winning openings, a main control means for executing a lottery for whether or not to give an advantageous gaming state to the player, and
A gaming machine provided with peripheral control means for determining an effect to be displayed based on information transmitted from the main control means.
The main control means has an information updating means capable of updating the information regarding the given game ball in any increase or decrease.
The first state in which the information about the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated to increase or decrease, and the first state in which the information about the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated to increase or decrease. There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information about the given game ball is updated to increase is suppressed as compared with the first state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the first state has transitioned to the second state.

(23B) The information regarding the game value is based on.
The main control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with the timing at which the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means is
Information about the game ball is written in the storage area at any timing of every predetermined time, for each predetermined number of prize balls, or for each predetermined number of consumed balls.
The information about the game ball written in the storage area is compared with the information about the game ball stored in the storage area before the writing, and the increase / decrease of the information about the game ball is determined.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase / decrease.

According to the inventions of 23A to 23C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even if the variable display game is interrupted for a long time.

(24A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
A means for acquiring the number of prize balls to be acquired by the player at a predetermined timing, and a means for acquiring the number of prize balls.
It is equipped with a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption ball consumed by the player.
The control means is
When the predetermined timing and the detection of the consumed sphere by the consumed sphere number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed spheres are within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information regarding the game value is based on
The control means is
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The total number of prize balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state are counted within the same repetition.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein information on the game value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Machine.

According to the inventions of 24A to 24B, the information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
An out-port detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through an out-port provided at the bottom of the game area, and an out-port detection means.
It is equipped with a winning ball detecting means for detecting a winning ball to a predetermined winning opening.
The control means is
It has a game state control means for controlling to one of the normal game states and the special game state in which the player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls that have passed through the out port is counted from the output of the out port detection means.
The number of winning balls is counted from the output of the winning ball detecting means, and the winning balls are counted.
The number of balls consumed by the player is counted by the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the counted out port and the number of winning balls.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25B) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is equipped with a detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area.
The control means is
It has a game state control means for controlling to one of the normal game states and the special game state in which the player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls launched into the game area is counted from the output of the detection means, and the consumed game balls consumed by the player are counted.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25C) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is equipped with a detection means that counts the number of gaming balls ejected from the gaming machine.
The control means is
It has a game state control means for controlling to one of the normal game states and the special game state in which the player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine is counted from the output of the detection means, and the number of balls consumed by the player is counted.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 25A to 25C, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(26A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means is
A game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state, and controlling the game state to any one of the normal game states.
A prize ball counting means for counting the number of prize balls by excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize opening that is allowed to win a prize.
It has a consumption ball number counting means for counting the number of consumption balls consumed by the player by excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information regarding the gaming value by using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information regarding the game value is based on
The number of prize balls in the normal game state is counted by excluding the number of prize balls given when the game balls launched toward the right side of the game area win a prize in the winning opening where the prize can be won.
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is counted by excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The control means is described in each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means calculates information regarding the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state. Gaming machine.

(26C) For a predetermined period after the control means detects the passage of the game ball of the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area or the winning of the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is excluded from the counting of the number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period according to either the lapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time for consuming a predetermined number of game balls, or the time for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by.

(26E) The control means excludes the number of passing balls of the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area and the number of winning balls to the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed.

According to the inventions of 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
The first data setting means for setting the first data according to the result of the game,
A second data setting means for setting the second data that does not depend on the result of the game,
A third data setting means for setting the third data according to the result of the game,
The first conversion means for obtaining the first conversion data from the first data set by the first data setting means and the second data set by the second data setting means, and
A second conversion means for obtaining the second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means.
A gaming machine characterized by having a display means for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means device does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value in a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is obtained by multiplying the first data and the second data at the timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is divided by the third data to obtain the second conversion data at the timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(27E) The first data is a game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given to the player.
The third data is the game value consumed by the player (for example, the number of out balls).
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain information on the added game value as the second conversion data.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display device displays information (for example, a base) regarding the gaming value obtained by the second conversion means.

According to the inventions of 27A to 27E, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the base value required for evaluation of gaming machines can be displayed accurately in real time. Further, by using the second conversion means (division means), it is possible to accurately display information on the game value (for example, a base value) in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes periodic processing to control the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It has a conversion means for calculating information on the game value, and has
The control means is
An argument is passed to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and the result converted based on the argument by the conversion means is obtained from the conversion means.
A gaming machine characterized in that a process of passing an argument and a process of acquiring the result of the conversion can be executed within one periodic process.

(28B) The conversion means is
It is an arithmetic circuit that performs division operations.
It has a divisor register to which a divisor is input, a divisor register to which a division is input, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation.
The control means is
Write arguments to the divisor register and the divisor register,
After a predetermined time has elapsed from the writing of the argument, the quotient is read from the result register, and the quotient is read.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the process of writing an argument to the divisor register and the divisor register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the program to be repeatedly executed.

(28C) A prize game medium number counting means for counting the game media given to the player in a predetermined game state, and
It has a consumption game medium number counting means for counting the game media consumed by the player in the predetermined game state.
The control means is
A value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game medium number counting means by 100 is written to the division number register.
The number of consumption game media counted by the consumption game medium number counting means is written in the divisor gista.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base value is read from the result register.

According to the inventions of 28A to 28C, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed within one iterative process (timer interrupt process), the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A winning opening where a game ball can be won, and
Control means to control the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
A consumption ball counting means for counting the consumption balls consumed by the player,
It has a prize ball counting means for counting prize balls given to a player, and has.
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize.
The control means is
Based on the counted number of consumed balls and the number of prize balls, the information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.
If a prize is detected in the specific winning opening even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and if the determination is made, the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality is determined. Is excluded from the number of balls consumed, and the information regarding the game value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29B) At least one of the winning openings is a starting winning opening that serves as an opportunity to derive a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large number of gaming balls.
When the starting winning opening is closed and a winning is detected in the starting winning opening, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the winning openings is a large winning opening opened in a special gaming state.
When the winning opening is detected while the winning opening is closed, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29D) The player has a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption ball consumed by the player.
Each of the preceding means is characterized in that the consumption ball counting means counts the consumption balls consumed by the player by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detecting means. The gaming machine described in the section.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed for calculating the information regarding the game value.
The consumption ball counting means adds the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detecting means to the total number of consumption balls, subtracts the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the total number of consumption balls, and obtains the consumption balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by counting.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed for calculating the information regarding the game value.
The consumption ball counting means counts the consumption balls by adding a value obtained by subtracting the number of consumption balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detection means to the total number of consumption balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs as a feature.

(29G) The winning opening can be switched between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize.
When the control means detects the winning of the winning opening in the closed state and does not pay out the winning balls in connection with the winning, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and determines the number of winning balls for the winning. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated by excluding from the number of consumed balls.

(29H) When the winning abnormality in the winning opening is detected a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the winning ball number related to the winning abnormality from the consumption ball number and displays it on the display means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value for playing is updated.

According to the inventions of 29A to 29H, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the number of winning balls related to abnormal winning can be excluded from the number of out balls, and information on the game value (for example, the base value) can be accurately displayed in real time.

(30) A gaming machine that gives a gaming medium as a prize to a player.
A game area where multiple winning openings are arranged,
When a game medium is detected in each of the winning openings, a prize-giving means for granting a predetermined specific prize from any of a plurality of prizes, and a prize-giving means.
A calculation processing means for executing a predetermined calculation process using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media given as prizes given by the prize-giving means.
A processing means for processing the result of the arithmetic processing executed by the arithmetic processing means, and
A display means for displaying the result of arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device is provided.
When a specific prize is generated among the plurality of prizes in a game, the prize-giving means grants the specific prize, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so as not to change. Amusement machine.

According to the invention of 30, the information regarding the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, prizes (for example, prize balls paid out in connection with winning a prize in a prize opening (for example, a general prize opening or a large winning opening with a large number of prize balls) to which a high-value prize is given) are generated when a specific prize is generated. Even if it is given, the result of arithmetic processing (calculated base value) can be displayed so that it does not change, and it is easy to determine whether the gaming machine is exhibiting the specified performance (for example, whether it is according to the set payout rate). can.

(31A) A game including a main control means including a lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winning when a specific condition is satisfied, and peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. It ’s a machine,
The peripheral control means
A temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means, and a temporary storage means.
Information storage means updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means, and
By providing a first information output means for outputting at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized in that the status history of the gaming machine can be grasped.

(31B) Equipped with a general winning opening where a game ball launched into the game area can be won even if it is not in a special game state.
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating winning to the general winning opening.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winning to the general winning opening to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(31C) When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the external output means for outputting the information based on the predetermined condition to the external terminal board and the external output means.
When the predetermined conditions are satisfied, an information storage means for storing more detailed information than the information output to the external terminal board, and an information storage means.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, comprising: an information presenting means for presenting information stored by the information storage means.

(31D) A first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine is provided.
The peripheral control means
A storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means, and a storage means.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a limited initialization means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even when it is initialized by the first initialization means. Machine.

(31E) The first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine,
A second initialization means for initializing the stored contents of the information storage means is provided.
The information storage means can retain the stored contents even when the power of the gaming machine is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first initialization means does not initialize the stored contents of the information storage means, but initializes the stored contents of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of a signal received from the main control means and the time when the signal is received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signals transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means include a signal related to a counting event counted according to the progress of the game and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. Including
The peripheral control means
A temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means, and a temporary storage means.
Information storage means updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means, and
It has a first information output means for outputting at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The peripheral control means
The counting event is counted based on the signal received from the main control means, and the counting result is stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine.
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
The signal related to the counting event received from the main control means is counted and stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event, the time when the signal is received and the information storage means are stored, and the counting event stored in the temporary storage means. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the counting result of the counting event is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine.
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
The signal related to the counting event received from the main control means is counted and stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each section before.

According to the inventions of 31A to 31I, it is possible to know how the ball was released. In particular, according to the inventions of 31D and 31E, information on the game can be properly stored.

(32) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
A control means that executes periodic processing related to the progress of the game,
A consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including a variable display of a symbol, and a first light emitting element group.
It has a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information on the given game value, and has.
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means.
Although the control means outputs a selection signal at a timing common to the first terminal and the third terminal, at least one of the first light emitting elements group is output during the period in which the selection signal is output. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting one light emitting element and a signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group. The game machine is characterized in that the display control of the first light emitting element group and the second light emitting element group is performed in one periodic process by outputting the above at different timings.

According to the invention of 32, a circuit for displaying information on the given game value (for example, a base value or a bonus ratio) can be simply configured, and information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
A control means that executes periodic processing related to the progress of the game,
A consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including a variable display of a symbol, and a first light emitting element group.
It has a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information on the given game value, and has.
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
At least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group corresponding to the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the selection signal output to the first terminal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal. Although the signals output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group corresponding to the above are output within the same periodic processing, the said first. The process of outputting the selection signal output to the terminal 1 and the signal output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal, and the selection signal output to the third terminal and the selection signal. The process of outputting signals to be output to the plurality of fourth terminals corresponds to a gaming machine characterized in that signals are output at different timings in the periodic process by different processes in the same periodic process. ..

According to the invention of 33, the circuit for displaying the information regarding the given game value can be simply configured. Therefore, information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
A consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
It has a calculation result display means for displaying information on the game value calculated by the calculation means.
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
A timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device, and
It has an output driving means controlled by the control device and at least outputting a control signal for displaying by the calculation result display means.
In the substrate on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction with respect to the control device, and the output driving means and the calculation result display means are arranged in a direction different from the one direction. A gaming machine characterized by being placed away from the timing means.

(34B) The connection line between the control device and the timing means and the connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to intersect each other. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal input to the control device and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal input to the control device.
On the printed circuit board on which the control means is realized, the reset circuit is arranged from the processor in the same direction as the oscillation circuit, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged apart from the reset circuit and the oscillation circuit. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

According to the inventions of 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress the interference between the signal related to the game control and the signal for displaying the information related to the game. Therefore, the influence on the game control can be suppressed, and the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(35A) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
A consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
It has a display means controlled by the control means and displaying information regarding the game value.
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
It has a memory that the control device accesses when the process is executed and stores at least information about the game value.
The gaming machine is provided with an input means for instructing the initialization of the memory.
The control means is
At a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal, and if it is determined to be abnormal, it is used as a first initialization means for initializing a predetermined first area of the memory. ,
At the time of turning on the power, it is determined whether or not the input means is operated, and if it is determined that the input means is operated, the second initialization means for initializing a predetermined second area of the memory is provided. Have and
The first region initialized by the first initialization means and the second region initialized by the second initialization means are the second initial region also by the first initialization means. Includes overlapping areas that are commonly initialized by the conversion means
At least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region.
The gaming machine, characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first region other than the overlapping region.

(35B) In the first area, data used for calculating information regarding the game value is stored.
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area.
The control means is
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area is initialized and the data is initialized.
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the second area is initialized and the data is initialized.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when it is determined that the input means is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) In the first area, data used for calculating information regarding the game value is stored.
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area.
The control means is
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized, and the data is initialized.
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized, and the data is initialized.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when it is determined that the input means is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35D) Each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal for each execution of periodic processing that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals. The gaming machine described in.

(35E) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraph, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first region is abnormal each time the information regarding the gaming value is calculated. ..

(35F) The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first region is abnormal when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

According to the inventions of 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory for storing the information (base value and bonus ratio) regarding the given game value. Therefore, information about the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
A consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
A display means for displaying information on the game value and
It has an electric accessory that is operated by the control means.
Under specific conditions, when a plurality of game media win a prize during the operation of the electric accessory triggered by one hit, among the prize-winning game media, some of the game media have information on the game value. A gaming machine characterized in that it is used for calculation and is not used for calculating information on the game value for other gaming media, but any gaming medium can trigger a variable display game.

(36B) The control means is
When the predetermined start conditions are met, the variable display game is executed, and
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first gaming state (time saving, high probability state, big hit, etc.) that is advantageous to the player and a second gaming state (normal state) that is less advantageous than the first gaming state. Control to one of
When a plurality of gaming media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the gaming medium won in the second gaming state is used for calculating information on the gaming value, and the first gaming. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs are characterized in that the gaming media that have won a prize in the state are not used for calculating the information regarding the gaming value, but any of the gaming media can trigger a variable display game.

(36C) The control means is
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines and detects them.
When a plurality of game media are won during one operation of the electric accessory, the winning game medium in a state where the error of a predetermined type is detected is used for calculating the information on the game value. However, although the game medium that won the prize in the state where the error of the predetermined type is not detected is used for calculating the information on the game value, any game medium can be a trigger for the variable display game. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 36A to 36C, since the game medium is switched to be used for calculating the information on the game value according to the state of the game machine, the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(37A) A gaming machine provided with an outer frame, a main body frame that is openable and closable to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to the game. hand,
When the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, it is difficult to change the setting, which makes it difficult to operate the setting change operation unit as compared with the case where the main body frame is open with respect to the outer frame. A gaming machine characterized by having a means of conversion.

(37B) When performing a setting change operation for changing the setting state related to the game, the outer frame, the main body frame that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame and the game board is provided, and the changed setting state. It is a gaming machine equipped with a setting status display unit to be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for making it difficult to see what is displayed by the setting state display unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) An outer frame, a main body frame that is openable and closable to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting determination operation unit for performing a setting determination operation for determining a setting state related to the game are provided. It ’s a pachinko machine,
A gaming machine characterized by having a determination difficulty means that makes it difficult to operate the setting determination operation unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine provided with an outer frame, a main body frame that is openable and closable to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to the game. hand,
The setting change operation unit has a setting key insertion unit into which a setting key is inserted.
When the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, it is characterized in that it is configured to prevent the setting key from being inserted into the setting key insertion portion by a specific portion of the outer frame. A game machine to play.

According to the inventions of 37A to 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudster to change the setting state illegally, and to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a variation display of a symbol is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as a variation display result of the symbol.
A variable time determining means for determining the variable time of the symbol, and
A setting information determination unit that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation for a specific operation unit is provided.
The gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time determining means can determine a specific fluctuation time when the setting information is determined as the specific information based on an operation on the specific operation unit.

(37F) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A variable time determining means for determining the variable time of the symbol, and
It is provided with a probability determination unit that determines the probability that the hit result is derived to one of a plurality of probabilities based on the operation for the specific operation unit.
The gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time determining means can determine a specific fluctuation time when the probability determined based on the operation for the specific operation unit is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A variable time determining means for determining the variable time of the symbol, and
A setting information determination unit that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation for a specific operation unit is provided.
The fluctuation time determining means may determine a common fluctuation time regardless of the setting information, or may determine a different fluctuation time according to the setting information.
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that a different variation time is determined according to the setting information is set lower than the probability that the common variation time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A variable time determining means for determining the variable time of the symbol, and
A setting information determination unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to a game based on an operation on a specific operation unit, and a setting information determination unit.
Equipped with an effect control unit that performs a predetermined effect,
The fluctuation time determining means can determine different fluctuation times according to the setting information.
When the specific variation time is determined by the variation time determining means in response to the specific setting information in the setting information, the effect control unit displays the variation of the symbol within the specific variation time. A gaming machine characterized in that a result suggestion effect suggesting a result and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the content of the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit are sequentially performed.

According to the inventions of 37E to 37H, it is possible to make the player detect the setting state in a new mode and improve the game entertainment.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control unit that controls a game, another control board connected to the main control board and provided with a control unit different from the game control unit, and the game control. It is a gaming machine equipped with a setting-related operation unit for changing the setting state related to the game performed by the department.
The game control unit has a setting change permissible state generating means that allows an operation related to a change of the setting state to the setting-related operation unit.
The setting change allowable state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the information transmitted from the separate control board to the main control board is specific information, the operation related to the change of the setting state is permitted. ..

According to the invention of 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudster to change the setting state illegally, and to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control unit that controls a game and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to control performed by the game control unit are provided, and a game area is operated by a player operating a predetermined launch operation unit. It is a gaming machine that gives a gaming profit by winning a prize in a predetermined winning opening with a gaming ball fired toward.
It is characterized by having a launch disabling means for disabling the launch of a gaming ball by the operation of the launch operation unit for a predetermined period when the setting change operation unit is operated to change the setting state. Gaming machine.

According to the invention of 37J, the act of illegally changing the setting state can be suppressed.

(38A) A gaming machine including a gaming control unit that controls a game and a setting operation unit for changing a setting related to control performed by the gaming control unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that the game control board constituting the game control unit and the setting board constituting the setting operation unit are housed in one case.

(38B) The case described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein, in place of the setting operation unit, a dummy unit that cannot perform an operation for changing the setting can be accommodated together with the game control unit. Pachinko machine.

(38C) The setting operation unit is
The first operation unit for starting the setting state in which the setting can be changed, and
A second operation unit for confirming the setting and ending the setting state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by having a setting display for displaying the contents of the setting.

(38D) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the dummy unit does not have any of the first operation unit, the second operation unit, and the setting display.

According to the inventions of 38A to 38D, the specifications of a gaming machine having a setting function and a gaming machine having no setting function can be standardized, and efficiently designed and produced.

(39A) A game control unit having a processor for executing a program for controlling a game, a memory accessed by the processor, and a game control unit.
A clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory, and
A gaming machine provided with a setting operation unit for changing settings related to control performed by the game control unit.
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed.
The game control unit
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation unit are detected.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is operated, the setting state is started.

(39B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control unit initializes a first area of the memory after the end of the setting state.

(39C) When the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is not operated, the game control unit is described in a second region that is at least partially different from the first region. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the memory is initialized.

According to the inventions of 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of setting change.

(40A) A gaming machine including a gaming control unit that controls a game and a setting operation unit for changing a setting related to control performed by the gaming control unit.
The game control unit has a game value display means for displaying information regarding the given game value.
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed, and a setting display means for displaying the contents of the setting.
The game control unit is characterized in that, in the set state, the game value display means and the setting display means are displayed so as not to be confused.

(40B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control unit and the setting operation unit are housed in one case.

(40C) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are composed of one display.

(40D) The game value display means displays information on the given game value on the display without delay as the game progresses.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information on the setting on the display device in place of the information on the given gaming value in the setting state.

(40E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are configured by different indicators.

(40F) The game value display means is
In other than the above setting state, the information regarding the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses.
In the setting state, any of the characters, numbers, and figures that are not displayed in the setting state is displayed.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The game value display means is
In other than the above setting state, the information regarding the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses.
In the above setting state, turn off or turn on all
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

According to the invention of 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent confusion of a plurality of displays arranged on the substrate.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 930 Power supply board box 951 Payout control board 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1311 Main control MPU (CPU)
1312 RAM
13121 Arithmetic circuit 1313 ROM
1314 Main control I / O port 1317 Accessory ratio indicator (base indicator)
1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2002 First start port 2004 Second start port 4000 Slot machine (game machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol fluctuation display device 4301 Reel 4341 Reel drive motor 4500 Image display unit 4600 Main board (game control device)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 5100 ROM area 5200 RAM area 5300 I / O area 5400 Parameter information setting area

Claims (1)

A game control means having a processor for executing a program for controlling a game and a memory accessed by the processor, and a game control means.
A clearing means for initializing a predetermined area of the memory and
The setting operation means operated when setting the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
Power-on means for turning on the power of the gaming machine, and
An external output means that can output various signals to the outside of the gaming machine,
Equipped with
The game control means is
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clearing means and the operation of the setting operating means can be detected, and the clearing means is operated and the setting operating means is operated. Start the setting state for setting the above setting value,
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clearing means and the operation of the setting operating means can be detected, the clearing means is not operated, and the setting operating means is operated. , Start the confirmation state to confirm the above set value,
A gaming machine characterized in that a signal is output from the external output means not only when the set state is started but also when the confirmation state is started.

Images